2023 GR A N D CHER OKEE/GR A N D CHER OKEE L

2023 GR AND CH EROKEE/GRAND CHEROK EE L

OWNER’S MANUAL

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).

USA Canada

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS

[Link]/om [Link]

©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Fifth Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 23_WL_OM_EN_USC

DID_5754794_23e_Grand_Cherokee_OM_EN_091923.indd 1 9/19/2023 [Link] AM

 This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is
moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction
common questions.
Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit [Link]/om (USA), [Link] (Canada) or your
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE local Jeep® brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting [Link].
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT [Link] (USA) Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT [Link] (CANADA) purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area drinking. Never drink and then drive.
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to [Link]/passenger-vehicle.

DID_5754794_23e_Grand_Cherokee_OM_EN_091923.indd 2 9/19/2023 [Link] AM

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4

5 MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 5

6 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 7

8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 8

9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 9

10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 10

11 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 11

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 1 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 2

INTRODUCTION DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SYMBOLS KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry . . . . . . 26 Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . . . 10 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . 28 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
SYMBOL GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . 28 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . 29 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . 46
KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 46
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . 47
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition . . . . . . . . . . 20 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . 30 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 47
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS — Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels . . . . . . 47
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
To Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Introducing Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Non-Rolling Code Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 23 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation — DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY SETTINGS — Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 49
Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . 32 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . 49
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory . 32 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 23
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Manual Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped . 33 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 24 Manual Adjustment Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 34 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Power Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped . . 37 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped . 51
Power Adjustment Rear Seats — If Equipped . . 39 High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Power Seatback Massage — If Equipped . . . . 40 Automatic High Beams — If Equipped . . . . . . 51
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 41 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . 25 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 52

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 2 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 3

Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . . . 52 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . 72 White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Headlight Illumination On Approach . . . . . . . 52 Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . 72 Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . 73 Gray Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . 101
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 53 Opening The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 53 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Headlight Leveling — If Equipped . . 54 To Unlock/Open The Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . 75 PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 To Lock/Close The Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Adjustable Power Liftgate Height . . . . . . . . . 76 STARTING AND OPERATING
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 77 STARTING THE ENGINE — GRAND CHEROKEE . . . 103
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . 55 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . 80 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition . . . . . . . . 103
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 56 Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR AutoPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . . . 57 INSTRUMENT PANEL Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And Digital Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . 83 Cold Weather Operation
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ANALOG INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . 62 After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Analog Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . 85
Climate Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . 106
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Location And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . 64 Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Display And Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 66 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . 90 SafeHold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Head Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped . . . . . . 91 Hold ‘N Go — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
USB/AUX Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Brake Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped . 92 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . 93
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped . . . . . . 70 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 8-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 109
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 3 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 4

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 112 ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 129 NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 149
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Detection Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off . . . . . 131 Service The Night Vision System . . . . . . . . 151
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/ Indications On The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Night Vision System Limitations . . . . . . . . . 151
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 113 System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 152
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 System Operation/Limitations . . . . . . . . . . 133 Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Quadra-Trac II System — If Equipped . . . . . . 114 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped . 115 ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 154
ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . 116 ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 155
Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . 116 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . 138 Tire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 138 Rim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . 138 Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . 138 Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Side Distance Warning System . . . . . . . . . 139 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . 118
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 155
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY . . . . . . . 119 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Trailer Towing Weights
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . 119 Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . 158
Autostop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Assistance Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Exiting The Parking Space . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . 120 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . 120 Active Lane Management Operation . . . . . . 144 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . 120 Turning Active Lane Management On Or Off . . 145 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) . 162
System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Active Lane Management Warning Message . 145 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 162
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Changing Active Lane Management Status . . 147 Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models . 163
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . 121 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . . . . . . 147 Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . 128 Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 (Single-Speed Transfer Case without 4WD LOW
Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Viewing At Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Range) Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . 163
Traffic Sign Assist Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . 148 Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II with
Indications On The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . 149

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 4 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 5

DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 First Time Starting Up (Using the Rear Screens) . 194 SAFETY
On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Alexa Voice Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
SAFETY FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Listen Via Vehicle Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . 204
Quick Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) — If Equipped . 204
MULTIMEDIA
Parental Controls (Using the Rear Screens) . . 196 Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) . . . . . . . 205
UCONNECT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System . . . . 206
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 (Using the Rear Screens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Media Sources Input
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . 169 (Using the Front Radio and Rear Screens) . . . 196
Forward Collision Warning
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . . . 188 Voice Remote with Alexa . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
(FCW) With Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Replacing the Voice Remote with Alexa
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 217
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . 221
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . 188 Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . 221
Passenger Screen Permissions . . . . . . . . . 188 streaming (Using the Front Radio and Rear
Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . 221
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Screens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Audio And Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Fire TV Apps/Games (Using the Rear
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . 227
Rear Seat Entertainment With Amazon Fire TV Screens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Built-In — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Are We There Yet? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
HDMI Projecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Using The Video USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Rear Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Connected Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
3RD PARTY APPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Legal & Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH AMAZON OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . 201
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Off-Road Pages Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Vehicle Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Accessory Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Pitch & Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
TV built-in from the Front Radio Screen . . . . 194 Selec-Terrain — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire Suspension — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TV built-in from the Rear Screens . . . . . . . . 194 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . 252
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . 203
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . 203 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . 252
built-in from the Passenger Screen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 5 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 6

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . 254 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Plastic And Coated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Leather Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 278 Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . 280
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) . . . . . . 320
Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . 320
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 2.0L Engine — Grand Cherokee . . . . . . . . . 321
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Rear-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . 269 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . 322
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . 322
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . 322
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . 314 (MMT) In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Snow Traction Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . 316
FLUID CAPACITIES — GRAND CHEROKEE . . . . . 323
Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engines . . . . . 270 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 GRAND CHEROKEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
2.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . 324
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 STORING THE VEHICLE — GRAND CHEROKEE . . . 317 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . 318 Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . 325
Pressure Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . 318 Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . 325

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 6 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 7

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 326
FCA Canada Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands . . . . . . . 326
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Ordering and Accessing Owner’s Information . . . 328
Change Of Ownership Or Address . . . . . . . . . . 328
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 7 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 8

INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. The all-new Jeep® Grand
Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L continues to build on its proud legacy as the most celebrated SUV ever, while raising the bar in luxury and performance. With legendary 4x4 capabil-
ity, this vehicle breaks new ground in exceptional performance, comfort, and functionality. We have improved on-road refinement and premium styling and craftsmanship inside
and out. With an unsurpassed blend of refined sophistication, dynamic performance, cutting edge technologies, and levels of elegance, the new Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand
Cherokee L carries an attractive presence and capability that is uncommon in its class, unquestionably Jeep® brand, and unmistakably world class.
The all-new Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L is a specialized utility vehicle and can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger
vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-
wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision page 166.
Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warn-
ings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 8 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INTRODUCTION 9

SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This 1
WARNING! These statements apply to operating pro- vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many pas-
cedures that could result in a collision, senger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applica-
bodily injury and/or death. tions. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other
CAUTION! These statements apply to procedures vehicles may not.
that could result in damage to your
vehicle. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa- collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.

FOOTNOTE Supplementary and relevant information

pertaining to the topic.
Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
Observe all Cautions and Warnings. disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 9 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 10 INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Red Warning Lights

WARNING! Battery Charge Warning Light

page 94
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Door Open Warning Light

SYMBOL GLOSSARY page 94

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol page 93. Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 94
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Warning Lights page 94

Active Driving Assist - Driver Inattentiveness Warning Light

page 93 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 95

Air Bag Warning Light

page 93 Hood Open Warning Light
page 95

Brake Warning Light

page 94

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 10 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INTRODUCTION 11

Red Warning Lights Red Warning Lights

1
Liftgate Open Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 95 page 95

Night Vision Animal Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light

page 95 page 96

Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light

page 95 page 96

Oil Pressure Warning Light Yellow Warning Lights

page 95
Active Driving Assist - Driver Inattentiveness Warning Light
page 96
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 95
Active Driving Assist Fault Warning Light
page 96
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 95
Active Lane Management Warning Light
page 97

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 11 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 12 INTRODUCTION

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Air Suspension Fault Warning Light Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
page 96 page 97

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light
page 96 page 97

Electric Park Brake Fault Warning Light Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 96 page 97

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light Night Vision Animal Warning Light
page 96 page 95

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
page 97 page 95

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Service 4WD Warning Light
page 97 page 98

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 12 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INTRODUCTION 13

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

1
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light 4WD Low Indicator Light
page 97 page 99

Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light Air Suspension Active Indicator Light
page 98 page 99

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or Pedestrian Emergency

Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
Braking (PEB) Warning Light
page 99
page 98

Service Stop/Start System Warning Light Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
page 98 page 99

Sway Bar Fault Warning Light Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
page 98 page 99

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
page 98 page 99

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 13 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 14 INTRODUCTION

Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light Active Lane Management Indicator Light
page 99 page 100

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or Pedestrian Emergency Braking

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
(PEB) OFF Indicator Light
page 100
page 99

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected

Max Payload Exceeded Indicator Light Indicator Light
page 99
page 100

NEUTRAL Indicator Light Auto HOLD Indicator Light

page 99 page 100

Sway Bar Indicator Light Cruise Control SET Indicator Light

page 99 page 100

Green Indicator Lights Front Fog Indicator Light

page 100
Active Driving Assist - Driver Attentive Indicator Light
page 100

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 14 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INTRODUCTION 15

Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

1
Night Vision Active Indicator Light Turn Signal/Hazard Indicator Lights
page 100 page 100

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light White Indicator Lights

page 100
Active Driving Assist On Indicator Light
page 101
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
page 100
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
page 101
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
page 101
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 101
Sport Mode Indicator Light
page 100
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
page 101
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 100
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light
page 101

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 15 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 16 INTRODUCTION

Blue Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

page 101

Gray Indicator Lights

Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light

page 101

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 16 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 17

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
KEYS A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the 2
KEY FOB LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no lon-
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports ger illuminates after a key fob button is pushed, then
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless the key fob battery requires replacement page 329.
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and remote power liftgate (if equipped) operation. The
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
key fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors and lift- Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
gate, as well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds
up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the sys- doors and the liftgate, push the lock button once.
tem. The key fob also contains an emergency key, which If enabled within the Uconnect system, the turn signals
is stored in the rear of the key fob. will flash and other illuminated entry features will be
activated when the doors are unlocked. When the doors
NOTE: are locked, the turn signals will flash and the horn will
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key fob will Key Fob chirp.
operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
NOTE: 1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock • If the vehicle is equipped with the Auto Relock fea-
• The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the 3 — Lock ture, and is unlocked with the key fob, and no door
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or 4 — Remote Start is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock
other electronic device. This may result in poor 5 — Power Liftgate and the Vehicle Security system will arm
performance. 6 — Panic (if equipped). This feature can be enabled/disabled
7 — Emergency Key within Uconnect Settings.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed • If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open,
In case the ignition switch does not change positions
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad page 70. the doors will lock. The doors will unlock again auto-
with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
matically if the key fob is left inside the passenger
• With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be veri-
compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are fied by referring to the instrument cluster, which will
disabled. display directions to follow. All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
For more information on ignition positions, see push of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
page 20. page 168.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 17 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Using The Panic Feature NOTE: • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See [Link]/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic but- • The doors have to be open and then closed in order for further information.
ton on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated, for the vehicle to check for the presence of a key
the turn signals will flash, the horn may pulse on and fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
off (if equipped with horn alarm), and the interior lights until all of the doors are closed. back housing or the printed circuit board.
will turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless
• These alerts will not be activated in situations where • Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob fob above the top row buttons blinks when a button
you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a sec- inside. is pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum
ond time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph of three years with normal vehicle usage.
(24 km/h) or greater. Using The Key Fob To Open Vehicle 1. Remove the emergency key (2) by pushing the emer-
NOTE: Windows — If Equipped gency key release button (1) on the side of the key
From outside of the vehicle, push and release the fob, and pulling the emergency key out with the
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the igni- unlock button on the key fob, and within five seconds other hand.
tion in the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn push and hold the unlock button for up to seven sec-
(if equipped with horn alarm) will remain on. onds. All vehicle door windows will open.

• You may need to be closer than 66 ft (20 m) from NOTE:

the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic feature due to the radio frequency noises • This feature is enabled through Uconnect Settings
page 168.
emitted by the system.
• Vehicle must be equipped with front and rear auto
Key Left Vehicle Feature up/down windows.
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The The replacement battery model is one CR2450 battery.
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display Emergency Key Removal
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and NOTE:
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
• Customers are recommended to use a battery 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery 2 — Emergency Key
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights. specifications may not meet the original OEM coin
battery specifications.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 18 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key fob, NOTE:
which is positioned farther to the edge than the left When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
side gap. Pry open the right side, and remove the the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the new
back cover. battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause bat-
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to slide the tery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
battery downward and back toward the key ring. with rubbing alcohol. 2
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push
down and slide the battery under the small lip on
the top edge of the opening.

Emergency Key Removed

2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left side
between the housing and the back cover of the key
fob. Use a small flat-bladed tool to pry apart the two
halves of the key fob. Make sure not to damage the Key Fob Battery Location
seal during removal.
NOTE:
You can also insert a screwdriver or similar tool into
the battery removal pocket to pry the battery out. Key Fob Battery Replacement

6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge

of the back cover with the top of the fob, and press
the edges into the interlocking hinges until all edges
snap together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into place.

NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.

Battery Removal Pocket

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 19 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to

WARNING! WARNING! start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event
• Always remember to place the Keyless Enter ‘n that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there
• The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery. Go™ Ignition in the OFF position when exiting the is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can vehicle. start and shut off after two seconds.
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
can lead to death. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho- vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
• If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention. is one that has never been programmed. soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

• Keep new and used batteries away from children. NOTE:

If the battery compartment does not close CAUTION!
securely, stop using the product and keep it away • When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
from children. serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer. with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
Programming And Requesting match the vehicle locks.
and loss of security protection.
Additional Key Fobs All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
Programming the key fob may be performed by an SENTRY KEY been programmed to the vehicle electronics
authorized dealer. page 329.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
NOTE: ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys- NOTE:
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation A key fob that has not been programmed is also consid-
• Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is ered an invalid key.
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another locked or unlocked.
vehicle.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
• Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau- IGNITION SWITCH
electronics can be used to start and operate the thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle. This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
WARNING! After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
is in the passenger compartment.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec- modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
unattended. tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the tion. These modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 20 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

battery. In this situation, a backup method can be

used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose WARNING!
side of the key fob (side opposite of the emergency
key) against the START/STOP ignition button and
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
push to operate the ignition switch. leave Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
• Replacement of the key fob battery is position. A child could operate power windows, 2
recommended. other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.

START/STOP Ignition Button

CAUTION!
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
The push button ignition can be placed in the following doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
modes:
OFF NOTE:
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
• The engine is stopped
• Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, • The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a
etc.) are still available WARNING!
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device, or
ON/RUN
• When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in the cupholders near aluminum cans; these
• Driving position in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and
• All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate con- vehicle, and lock your vehicle. prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from start-
ing the vehicle.
trols, heated seats, etc.) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
START access to an unlocked vehicle. • For more information on the engine starting proce-
• The engine will start (when foot is on the brake • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dure, see page 103.
pedal) dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children • When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime
NOTE: should be warned not to touch the parking brake, will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• If the ignition position does not change with a push OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
of the ignition button, and the instrument cluster (Continued) “Ignition ON” will display in the cluster.
displays a message such as “Key Fob Not
Detected”, the key fob may have a low or depleted

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 21 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: • Vehicle Security Light is flashing

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED • Ignition in OFF position
• If the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
too rapidly during activation, the vehicle may not • Fuel level meets minimum requirement
while still maintaining security. The system has
start. • Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
a range of approximately 328 ft (100 m). • With Remote Start, the engine will only run for • Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold 15 minutes.
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi- • Remote Start can only be used twice. WARNING!
ent conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
NOTE: vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range page 329.
• The parking lights will turn on and remain on during monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
Remote Start mode.
injury or death when inhaled.
• Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur when • Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
WARNING! Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight Illumination
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
On Approach” is enabled within Uconnect Settings.
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or controls could cause serious injury or death.
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon- • For security, power window and power sunroof
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon- operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
death when inhaled.
• The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated tem, either push and release the unlock button on the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other for a third cycle. key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
controls could cause serious injury or death. Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start: handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
HOW TO USE REMOTE START • Gear selector in PARK cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key • Doors closed button.
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will • Hood closed The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp • Liftgate closed Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
• Hazard switch off cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) tion, the climate controls will resume the previously set
third time shuts the engine off. • Battery at an acceptable charge level operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
• System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 22 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE: Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) • Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
• To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will The climate controls will automatically adjust to the • Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid optimal temperature and mode settings depending on • Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
Remote Start request.
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the • Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — climate controls will resume their previous settings. • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset 2
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start For more information on ATC and climate control set- The instrument cluster display message stays active
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru- tings, see page 57. until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button. NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED position. The climate control setting will change, and IF EQUIPPED
exit automatic operation, if manually adjusted by the The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security sys-
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or will turn the system off.
less. The timing is dependent on the ambient tempera- tem is armed, interior switches for door locks and lift-
gate release handle are disabled. If something triggers
ture. Once the timer expires, the system will automati- REMOTE START WINDSHIELD the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the
cally adjust the settings depending on ambient condi-
tions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION — following audible and visible signals:
If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation. IF EQUIPPED • The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
REMOTE START COMFORT When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
• The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will will flash
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will con- TO ARM THE SYSTEM
heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature tinue page 168. Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
will turn on if selected in the Comfort menu screen 1. If any doors, windows, or the sunroof are open,
within Uconnect Settings page 168. In warm REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE close them.
weather, the driver vented seat feature will automati- One of the following messages will display in the instru-
cally turn on when Remote Start is activated, if pro- ment cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start 2. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
grammed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will or exits Remote Start prematurely: position.
adjust the climate control settings depending on the
• Remote Start Canceled — Door Open ○ Make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system
outside ambient temperature. is OFF.
• Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 23 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • The Vehicle Security system remains armed when SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
vehicle: the power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button
○ Push lock on the interior power door lock switch on the key fob. If someone enters the vehicle OVERRIDE
with the driver and/or passenger door open. through the opened liftgate, then opens any door The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
from the inside, the alarm will sound. doors using the emergency lock lever page 25.
○ Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in • If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the TAMPER ALERT
the same exterior zone page 26. liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and
○ Push the lock button on the key fob. the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system
unless all doors are set to unlock on first press in your absence, the horn will sound three times and
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Vehicle
within Uconnect Settings. the exterior lights will blink three times when you dis-
Security Light (located in the lower right portion of the
instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every two • When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte- arm the Vehicle Security system.
seconds until it is disarmed. rior power door lock switches will not unlock the

NOTE:
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
If the system is armed by pushing the lock button on
the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
IF EQUIPPED
flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is ously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors,
closed, then slow down to every two seconds. Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether hood latch, and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any disarm the Vehicle Security system. vehicle tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the
of the following methods: If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor moni-
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will tors the vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away, tire
• Push the unlock button on the key fob. remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the removal, ferry transport, etc.).
• Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the
door page 26.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. horn will sound for 29 seconds, and the exterior lights
• Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm will flash followed by approximately five seconds of no
the system. REARMING OF THE SYSTEM activity. This will continue for eight cycles if no action is
NOTE: If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken taken to disarm the system.
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
• The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds TO ARM THE SYSTEM
the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cyl- between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger Follow these steps to arm the security system:
inder when the alarm is armed will sound the alarm remains active) and then rearm itself.
when the door is opened. 1. If any doors, windows, or the sunroof (if equipped)
are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 24 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the TO DISARM THE SYSTEM The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle: vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
○ Push lock on the interior power door lock switch of the following methods: ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
○ Push the lock button on the exterior Passive • Push the unlock button on the key fob. Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
• Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
Entry door handle with a key fob available in the
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, 2
same exterior zone page 26. door page 26.
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
○ Push the lock button on the key fob. • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi- If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
tion by pushing the START/STOP ignition button
NOTE: (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle). becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• When armed, the interior motion sensor detects NOTE: exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
movement within the vehicle's interior, including occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
moving objects (i.e., people and pets) and air cur- • The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
rents through open windows or the sunroof. The on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
windows and sunroof should be closed, and moving Security system.
objects should not be left in the vehicle when the OVERRIDE
intrusion detection is armed, otherwise false alarms
• The Vehicle Security system remains armed during The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
can occur. not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone doors using the emergency lock lever page 25.
• Once the security system is armed, it remains in enters the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then
that state until you disarm it by following either of
the disarming procedures described. If a power loss
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
DOORS
occurs after arming the system, you must disarm
• When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the
the system after restoring power to prevent alarm doors. MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
activation. The front doors can be manually unlocked with a single
• The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector) pull of the inside door handle. The driver’s door can
• The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector) actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
also be manually unlocked by inserting the emergency
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can
the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can key into the lock cylinder on the outside door handle.
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock
the Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock NOTE:
button on the key fob three times within 15 seconds
button on the key fob three times within 15 seconds When using the emergency key to unlock the outside
of arming the system (while the Vehicle Security
of arming the system (while the Vehicle Security door handle, make sure the handle of the emergency
Light is flashing rapidly). The vehicle will remain
Light is flashing rapidly). The vehicle will remain key is pointing toward the rear of the vehicle. This will
locked but will disable the alarm in the case of
locked but will disable the alarm in the case of ensure the handle can be pulled all the way out while
repeated false alarms due to ambient conditions.
repeated false alarms due to ambient conditions. the key is in the lock cylinder.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 25 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a double The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the key fob
pull of the inside door handle. WARNING! is detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button
on the front door panel is used to lock the door, then
Each door can be manually locked by inserting the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with the door is closed. The horn will also chirp to alert the
emergency key into the emergency lock lever and slid- access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
ing the lever upward. The emergency lock lever is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num- driver. This will occur for two attempts. On the third
located on the door latch face of each door. ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously attempt, the doors will lock even if the key fob is inside.
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
NOTE:
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
in a location accessible to children, and do not automatically.
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power win- If the door lock button is pushed while the ignition is in
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. the ON/RUN position and the driver's door is open, the
doors will not lock.
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks
POWER DOOR LOCKS Power door lock buttons are located on each rear door
The power door lock buttons are located on each front trim panel. Push the lock button to lock the rear door or
Emergency Lock Lever (Driver’s Door Shown) door panel. Push the lock button to lock all doors and push the unlock button to unlock the rear door.
liftgate, or the unlock button to unlock all doors and
NOTE: liftgate. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in the lock PASSIVE ENTRY
• The emergency lock lever is only accessible when button will illuminate.
the door is open. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
• Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature allows you
Security system.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having
to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
WARNING! If equipped, the rear doors will also have Passive Entry
• For personal security and safety in the event of a capabilities.
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 26 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

NOTE: To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
• Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Uconnect Settings page 168.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Pas- door automatically. Grabbing the front passenger door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
sive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile handle (or a rear handle when equipped with four-door is in the OFF position. 2
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these Passive Entry) will unlock all doors and the liftgate There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and automatically. search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
• Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated approach • A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
(low beams, license plate lamp, parking lights, door handle while a door is open.
handle pocket lights [if equipped]) for a preset dura- • A lock request is made by the door panel switch
tion of 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry while the door is open.
unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal • When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm or
lights. armed status and the liftgate transitions from
opened to closed.
• If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door • When the liftgate transitions from open to closed
handle, the unlock and lock sensitivity can be and Remote Start is active.
affected, resulting in a slower response time. When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
• The doors may lock and unlock when water is detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
sprayed on the Passive Entry door handles, if the NOTE: vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
key fob is located outside of the vehicle within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the handle. • Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock NOTE:
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Pas-
• Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp and one depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect sive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
flash of turn signal lights. These settings can be pro-
system page 168. vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow-
grammed on/off within Uconnect Settings
ing conditions are true:
page 168. • All doors will unlock when the front passenger (or a
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
rear door when equipped with four-door Passive • The doors are manually locked using the emergency
Entry) door handle is grabbed regardless of the driv- lock lever.
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
er’s door unlock preference setting.
relock and will rearm the Vehicle Security system • Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
(if equipped). door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
handle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 27 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate NOTE: To Lock The Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle, touch the • After touching the door handle lock icon, you must the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
lock icon on the door handle to lock all four doors and doors using any Passive Entry door handle. This is on the outside liftgate door handle.
liftgate. done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by NOTE:
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect Set- and the liftgate page 329.
tings, the key fob protection described in "Frequency
Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON
remains active/functional.
EXIT
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
fob battery is depleted.
power door locks after the following sequence of
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate actions:
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
electronic liftgate release button. With a valid Passive
enabled within Uconnect Settings page 168.
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock electronic liftgate release button for a power open on 2. All doors are closed.
vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Pull the electronic
NOTE: liftgate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the lock PARK.
icon. This could unlock the door(s). 4. Any door is opened.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —

IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking 2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 28 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK • After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS certain it is in the locked position.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a WARNING!
Child-Protection Door Lock system. 2
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat- Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on from the outside with the Child-Protection locks
a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by engaged (locked).
using the outside door handle even if the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position. NOTE:
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for To unlock the steering column, push the lever down-
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the ward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock move the steering wheel upward or downward as
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
inside. the lever upward until fully engaged.

STEERING WHEEL WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
NOTE: driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column this warning may result in serious injury or death.
• When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
outside door handle even though the inside door
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
lock is in the unlocked position.
steering column.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the unlocked position.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 29 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING HEATED STEERING WHEEL — WARNING!

STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED IF EQUIPPED • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column The steering wheel contains a heating ele- insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or ment that helps warm your hands in cold ing wheel covers of any type and material. This
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping weather. The heated steering wheel has only may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
steering column control is located below the multifunc- one temperature setting. Once the heated
tion lever on the steering column. steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may
not turn on when it is already warm. UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
The heated steering wheel button is located on the cen-
ter of the instrument panel below the radio screen, and TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
within the Comfort screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn INTRODUCING VOICE
the heating element on.
RECOGNITION
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
time to turn the heating element off.
ful quick tips. These key Voice Commands and tips will
NOTE: help you control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
The engine must be running for the heated steering system.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
wheel to operate.
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column. For information on use with the Remote Start system,
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
see page 23. The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
NOTE: any point while using your Uconnect system.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use Push the VR button on the steering wheel or say the
WARNING!
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column
to saved positions page 31.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Jeep®”. The factory default Wake Up word is set to “Hey
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe- Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed through the
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
WARNING! exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe- • “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
cially if used for long periods. • “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
(Continued) Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
Recognition system’s status.
this warning may result in serious injury or death.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 30 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

GET STARTED DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY

The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system. You can also use the sys- SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
tem’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice recognition. The
“Wake Up” word can be set through the Uconnect Set- This feature allows the driver, and if equipped, also the
tings page 168. front passenger to save up to two different memory 2
profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
memory profile saves desired position settings for the
• Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen- following features:
ger conversations are examples of noise that may
Driver’s Side
impact recognition.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while • Seat position
facing straight ahead. Uconnect Voice Command Buttons • Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
• Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the • Side mirrors
VR button or say the “Wake Up” word, wait until 1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push The • Power tilt and telescopic steering column
after the beep, then say your Voice Command. Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navi- (if equipped)
gation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
• You can interrupt the help message or system Or Receive A Text • A set of desired radio station presets
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a 1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push Passenger’s Side (If Equipped)
Voice Command from the current category. The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently In
• Seat Position
• You can also interrupt the help message or system Progress The memory settings switches are located on the front
prompts by speaking. This feature is called “barge-
door panels, next to the door handle, and consists of
in” and can be set through the Uconnect Settings
three buttons:
page 168. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and memory save function.
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. page 329.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
[Link] (US) or [Link] (Canada).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 31 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory NOTE:
switch. Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s side
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the
display will indicate which memory position has key fob.
been set.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, NOTE:
but the vehicle must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if the
a memory profile. vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• To recall a memory settings profile using the
Memory Setting Buttons LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY memory switches, push memory button (1) or (2) on
FOB TO MEMORY the memory switch.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two • To recall the driver’s side memory settings using the
• Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob
saved driver’s side memory profiles.
be linked to either driver’s side memory position linked to memory position 1 or 2.
1 or 2. NOTE: A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
Before programming your key fobs you must select the buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing any of
• Front passenger memory settings cannot be linked “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature through the seat adjustment switches. When a recall is can-
to a key fob.
the Uconnect Settings page 168. celed, the seat and power tilt/telescopic steering col-
umn (if equipped) will stop moving. A delay of one sec-
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY To program your key fobs, perform the following:
ond will occur before another recall can be selected.
FEATURE 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following: 2. Select a desired driver’s side memory profile, 1 or 2. SEATS
NOTE: 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
the vehicle.
profile from memory. 4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position WARNING!
(do not start the engine). display in the instrument cluster.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- 5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
within 10 seconds. outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt/telescopic these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
steering column [if equipped], and radio station or killed.
presets).
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 32 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

WARNING!
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
on the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
rearward to the desired position and release the lever.
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 2
To return the seatback to its normal position, lean for-
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and ward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback is
using a seat belt properly. latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
rearward.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS — IF EQUIPPED Adjustment Bar

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under

WARNING!
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rear-
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan- ward. Release the bar once you have reached the
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could desired position. Then, using body pressure, move for-
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not ward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
be adjusted properly and you could be injured. adjusters have latched.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the WARNING!
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your Recline Lever
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. control which could cause a collision and serious WARNING!
injury or death. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
Manual Front Passenger Seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
Forward/Rearward Adjustment injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted which could result in serious injury or death.
seat belt.
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front
of the seat cushion, near the floor.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 33 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT REAR WARNING!

SEATS Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
Vehicles equipped with third row seating may have a shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
second row bench seat, or second row captain’s chairs. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
Vehicles equipped with only second row seating, will which could result in serious injury or death.
have a second row bench seat.

SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT

WARNING!
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a still maintains some rear seating room.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
NOTE:
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
NOTE: ADJUSTMENT position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for on the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the seat forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
an extended period of time. This is normal and by sim- rearward to the desired position and release the lever. To lower the seatback, pull upward on the recline lever
ply unfolding the seats to the open position, over time To return the seatback to its normal position, lean for- located on the outboard side of the seat, and let the
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape. ward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback is seatback fold forward automatically.
latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped rearward.
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT — IF EQUIPPED
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the
seat near the floor and release it when the seat is at
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.

Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat

Rear Seat Recline Lever

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 34 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into its origi- Second Row Captain’s Chairs —
nal position and lock it into place.
If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with third row seating may be
WARNING! equipped with second row captain’s chairs.
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS 2
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability FORWARD/REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the
latched seat could cause serious injury. seat near the floor and release it when the seat is at
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT EASY ACCESS seat adjusters have latched.
Access To Third Row Seats
FOR THIRD ROW — IF EQUIPPED
If the vehicle is equipped with third row seating, the To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the seat-
second row seats can tip forward to allow passengers to back upright until it locks and push the seat rearward
easily access the third row seats. until the track locks.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the out-
board side of the seatback, then tip and slide the entire
seat forward.

Rear Seat Adjustment Bar

Easy Entry Lever Location

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 35 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE Second Row Captain’s Chairs Fold Flat Seats Second Row Captain’s Chair Easy Access For
ADJUSTMENT The second row seatbacks can be folded flat to carry Third Row
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located cargo. The second row seats can tip forward to allow passen-
on the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the seat Pull upward on the recline lever located on the out- gers to easily access the third row seats.
rearward to the desired position and release the lever. board side of each second row seat, and guide the Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the out-
To return the seatback to its normal position, lean for- seatback down into the folded position. board side of the seatback, then tip and slide the entire
ward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback is seat forward.
latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
rearward.

Second Row Captain’s Chairs Folded Flat

Easy Entry Lever Location
To Raise The Rear Seats
Rear Seat Recline Lever Fold the seatbacks upward to their original position,
and lock them into place.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
which could result in serious injury or death. position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.

Access To Third Row Seats

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 36 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the seat- Power Adjustment Front Seats —
back upright until it locks and push the seat rearward
until the track locks.
If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with 12-way power
MANUAL FOLDING THIRD ROW — driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
IF EQUIPPED switches are located on the outboard side of the seat.
There are three switches that control the movement of 2
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase
the seat cushion and the seatback.
the cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release
handle located on the back of the seat and lower the
seat using the pull strap located next to the release
handle.

NOTE: Third Row Folded

The second row seats must be in their full upright posi-
tion or folded flat when folding the third row seats. To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the
strap located on the back of the seat.

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into Power Seat Switches
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly 1 — Cushion Extender Switch (If Equipped)
latched seat could cause serious injury. 2 — Seat Switch
3 — Seatback And Bolster Adjustment Switch

ADJUSTING THE SEAT FORWARD OR

Release Handles REARWARD
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 37 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ADJUSTING THE SEAT UP OR DOWN CUSHION EXTENDER

CAUTION!
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. The cushion can be extended forward a few inches
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat Do not place any article under a power seat or (centimeters) to increase thigh support. Push the cush-
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to ion extender switch forward or rearward to extend or
Release the switch when the desired position has been the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if retract the cushion. Release the switch when the
reached. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's desired position has been reached.
path.
TILTING THE SEAT UP OR DOWN POWER LUMBAR — IF EQUIPPED
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two SEATBACK BOLSTER ADJUSTMENT — Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will IF EQUIPPED lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch The front driver and passenger seatback bolsters can power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
when the desired position has been reached. be extended outward, or retracted inward by pushing lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the bolster adjustment button located in the center of the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
RECLINING THE SEATBACK the seatback switch. the switch will raise and lower the position of the
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or Push the top of the button to extend the bolsters, or support.
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rear- push the bottom of the button to retract the bolsters.
ward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious Power Lumbar Switch
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
Seatback Bolster Adjustment Button
seat belt. EASY ENTRY/EXIT SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
1 — Extend Seatback Bolsters This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
2 — Retract Seatback Bolsters to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
the vehicle.
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 38 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where

WARNING!
• The third row seat belts may interfere with the
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt web-
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. bing behind the stow clip before stowing or opening
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the seat. When the seat is in the desired position,
• When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
remove the webbing from the stow clip so that it is
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
(6 cm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater belt, which could result in serious injury or death. ready for use. Never leave the seat belt in the stow
clip when it is used to restrain an occupant. 2
than or equal to 2.7 inches (6.8 cm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
• Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to • The head restraints will lower automatically as nec-
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be posi- essary when the power seat begins to move when
ON/RUN position. tioned properly on the occupant and they could be the vehicle is in PARK, and a rear door or the liftgate
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when more seriously injured in an accident as a result. is open.
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding posi-
(2.3 cm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, tions for the second and third row seats. The second
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat row seats can be folded using these switches, while the
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. CAUTION!
third row can be folded or unfolded.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Do not place any article under a power seat or
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
profile page 31. the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
NOTE: path.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
within the Uconnect system page 168.
REAR SEAT POWER FOLDING SEATBACKS —
Power Adjustment Rear Seats — IF EQUIPPED
If Equipped If the vehicle is equipped with third row seating, the
second and third rows may be equipped with power
folding seatbacks.
WARNING!
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. right rear trim panel inside the cargo area, as part of a
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of switch bank. 1 — Second Row Left Side Fold
control which could cause a collision and serious 2 — Second Row Right Side Fold
injury or death. NOTE:
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat • You may need to move the front seats forward to 4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious allow the second row seats to fold properly, as they
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted may bump into the Rear Seat Entertainment touch-
seat belt. screens (if equipped).
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 39 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

There are also power folding switches for the third row NOTE:
seats located on the C-pillar (just behind the rear doors
on the trim panels). • The engine must be running for the power seatback
massage to operate.
• The massage feature will turn off after 20 minutes
of use. However, if the massage type or intensity
level is changed, the timer then resets.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

WARNING!
Door Panel Massage Button • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
Once activated by either method, the massage controls tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
will display on the radio screen, and “Massage Type” exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown)
and “Intensity Level” can be selected for the activated cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
seat. burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold for long periods of time.
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold There are four intensity levels and five massage types
that can be selected. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
Intensity Levels: insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
Power Seatback Massage — If Equipped ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbacks may be • High Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
equipped with power massage. • Med cause serious burns due to the increased surface
The massage feature can be turned on/off through the • Low temperature of the seat.
massage button located on the door panel near the • Off
handle, or through the Comfort screen on the radio. Massage Types: FRONT HEATED SEATS
• Waterfall The front heated seats control buttons are
• Lower Back located on the center stack below the radio
screen or within the Uconnect system. You
• Extend can gain access to the control buttons
• Low Extend through the Comfort screen.
• Rock Climb • Press the heated seat switch once to turn the HI
The selected settings will save in the system’s memory setting on.
when turned off, and will resume the next time the sys-
tem is turned on. • Press the heated seat switch a second time to turn
the MED setting on.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 40 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

• Press the heated seat switch a third time to turn the The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator REAR VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
LO setting on. changes it.
The two second row outboard seats may be
• Press the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn
NOTE: equipped with ventilated seats. The rear ven-
the heating elements off. tilated seat control switches are located on
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
the rear of the center console and allow the
NOTE: operate.
rear passengers to operate the seats independently. 2
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt Ventilated Seats — If Equipped The fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED, and LO.
within two to five minutes. Push the ventilated seat switches to toggle through the
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans that speeds, or to turn the feature off.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to draw the air from the passenger compartment and
There are two ventilated seat switches
operate. move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the help keep the occupant cooler in higher ambient • Push the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI.
operator changes it. temperatures. • Push the ventilated seat switch a second time to
choose MED.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, FRONT VENTILATED SEATS
see page 23. The ventilated seats control buttons are
• Push the ventilated seat switch a third time to
choose LO.
REAR HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED located on the center stack below the radio
• Push the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to turn
screen or within the Uconnect system. The
The two second row outboard seats may be the ventilation off.
fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED and LO.
equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear pas- • Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI. NOTE:
sengers to operate the seats independently. • Press the ventilated seat switch a second time to The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
The heated seat switches for each heater are located choose MED. operate.
on the rear of the center console. • Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to
Head Restraints
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings. choose LO.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
Indicator lights in each switch illuminate indicating the • Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
level of heat in use. turn the ventilation off.
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
• Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI set- NOTE: of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
ting on.
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
• Push the heated seat switch a second time to turn operate. WARNING!
the MED setting on.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
• Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn the see page 23. • All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
LO setting on. ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
• Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn head restraints are placed in their proper positions
the heating elements off. in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 41 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the

WARNING! head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired WARNING!
and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the the top of the head restraint to the forward most posi- • All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could tion and release. The head restraint will return to the head restraints are placed in their proper positions
cause serious injury or death in the event of a rear most position. in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
collision. event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver and cause serious injury or death in the event of a
passenger head restraints. collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, HEAD RESTRAINTS — SECOND ROW CAP-
and push downward on the head restraint. TAIN’S CHAIRS (IF EQUIPPED)
NOTE: If the second row is equipped with captain’s chairs, the
head restraints are not adjustable or removable. They
The head restraints should only be removed by quali- Upright Position automatically fold forward when the seatback is folded,
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
and do not return to their normal position when the
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
seatback is raised. After returning the seatback to its
dealer.
upright position after a folding operation, raise the
head restraint until it locks in place.

WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
(Continued)
Forward Adjustment

Head Restraint Adjustment Button

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 42 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43

THIRD ROW HEAD RESTRAINTS —

WARNING!
IF EQUIPPED
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the The third row head restraints are not adjustable or
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
removable, but can be folded for improved visibility
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no occu-
cause serious injury or death in the event of a 2
pants in the seats.
collision.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
HEAD RESTRAINTS — SECOND ROW BENCH power fold the third row head restraints.
(IF EQUIPPED)
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat, the The head restraints will also automatically fold when
head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust- Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button the seatbacks are folded forward using the release
able or removable. They automatically fold forward handles on the backs of the seats from the cargo area.
when the seatback is folded, and do not return to their NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see NOTE:
normal position when the seatback is raised. After
page 221.
returning the seatback to its upright position after a • The head restraints must be raised manually when
folding operation, raise the head restraint until it locks occupying the third row.
in place. WARNING!
The center head restraint has one adjustment position,
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
and can be adjusted up or down when the seat is occu- • All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
pied. Pull up on the head restraint to raise it. To lower ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
the head restraint, push the adjustment button located head restraints are placed in their proper positions WARNING!
on the base of the head restraint, and push downward in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
on the head restraint until it locks into place. event of a crash. • All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
NOTE:
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
The center head restraint is not removable. in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
event of a crash.
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision. • Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 43 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR —

IF EQUIPPED
Inside Rearview Mirror The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
MANUAL MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
from vehicles behind you.
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be NOTE: Digital Rearview Mirror
reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view. 1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position You can turn the feature on or off through the Uconnect 2 — Menu Button
(small control forward toward the windshield). system page 168. 3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button

Push the menu button next to the on/off control/toggle

to access the following mirror options:
• Brightness
• Tilt
Use the menu button to scroll through the feature options,
Automatic Dimming Mirror and the left and right scroll buttons to adjust the feature
content (brightness or tilt) higher/lower or up/down.
DIGITAL REARVIEW MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED When not in use, push the on/off forward toward the
Adjusting Rearview Mirror The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high definition, windshield to return the mirror to the regular Automatic
wide and unobstructed view of the road behind while Dimming Mirror.
driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic Dimming
NOTE:
Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Rearview Mirror • The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective during
mode. nighttime driving in low light applications due to low
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/off ambient light levels. In the event that it provides the
control lever on the bottom of the mirror rearward user with less than expected vision, the mirror can
toward the driver. be reverted to a normal reflective electrochromatic
mirror by pushing the control/toggle forward in the
vehicle and putting the mirror into Automatic Dim-
ming Mirror mode.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 44 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45

• When the rear window washer is activated by push- 4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL AND
ing the windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the blockage.
APPROACH LIGHTING — IF EQUIPPED
Rear Back Up and Digital Rearview Mirror
(if equipped) cameras are also washed. For more NOTE: Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
information, see page 57. The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
visor is against the windshield for additional sun block- located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors age through the front of the vehicle. Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
2
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front
the visors.
Outside Mirrors and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mir- flashers will also activate these LEDs.
automatically. ror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. which turns on in both mirrors when you use the key fob
or open any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate
WARNING! the front and rear door handles. It also shines down-
ward to illuminate the area in front of the doors.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the NOTE:
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex The approach lighting will not function when the gear
mirror. selector is moved out of the PARK position.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —

Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
If Equipped
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
SUN VISOR SLIDE-ON-ROD FEATURE — forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have The outside driver side mirror will automatically adjust
IF EQUIPPED three detent positions: for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is con-
trolled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mir-
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional • Full forward position ror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the • Full rearward position the inside mirror adjusts.
sun. • Normal position
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 45 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Mirrors Power Folding — If Equipped The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following situa-
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding Mir- tions after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
The power mirror control switch is located on the driv-
er's side door trim panel. ror function, rotate the control switch to the power fold- • Pushing the lock button on the door panel before
ing position. Rotating the control to the left, right, or the door is opened.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the mirror
neutral position will return the mirrors to the driving
you want to adjust (L) or (R). Then push the switch in
position. NOTE:
the direction that you want the mirror to move. If the doors are already locked, push the lock button
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and again.
vice versa), the movement direction is reversed. • Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors the door panel, followed by closing the door.
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the • After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push
following occurs: the lock button on the key fob.
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. • After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch
the lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding
mirror switch). will unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving NOTE:
speeds. If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the power
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will
them by turning the switch (this may require multiple not automatically unfold.
switch activations to synchronize the driver and passen-
Power Mirror Switch ger mirror). This resets them to their normal position. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Driver These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
1 — Neutral Position Memory Settings (if equipped) page 31. This feature will be activated whenever you
2 — Left Mirror turn on the rear window defroster
3 — Control Switch Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — (if equipped) page 57.
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position If Equipped
When enabled within Uconnect Settings page 168,
NOTE: the exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after
neutral position to prevent accidental movements. the doors are locked and closed.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 46 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — Use this QR code to access your digital Before You Begin Programming
If Equipped experience. HomeLink®
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the • HomeLink® replaces up to three the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
hand-held transmitters that operate
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will Scan me that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
move slightly downward from the present position when
devices such as garage door open-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the 2
ers, motorized gates, lighting or
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is pow-
then return to the original position when the vehicle is mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
ered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In • The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
Reverse position. overhead console or sun visor designate the three
before you begin programming.
different HomeLink® channels.
NOTE: It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
• To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons
on and off using the Uconnect system page 168. will activate the devices they are programmed to If you require assistance, please call toll-free
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink® 1-800-355-3515 or visit [Link].
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR button.
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels
OPENER (HOMELINK®) — • The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
center button.
IF EQUIPPED 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys- 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
tem is active page 329. (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.

NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.

HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 47 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ton you wish to program, while keeping the
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
Before programming a device to one of your and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to gramming is complete.
program while you push and hold the garage door
Rolling Code Devices opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the the garage door opener motor does not operate,
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica- repeat the steps from the beginning.
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
button located where the antenna is attached to the WARNING!
device. The button may not be immediately visible when NOTE:
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
may vary slightly by manufacturer. while you are programming the universal trans-
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or
NOTE: final steps. pets are in the path of the door or gate.
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps • Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
normally use to operate the device. fined area while programming the transceiver.
NOTE:
Non-rolling Code Devices Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
or “TRAIN” button. 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), can cause you and others to be severely injured or
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu- killed.
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
Door Opener attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. Programming HomeLink® To A
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
Miscellaneous Device
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a mis-
NOTE: for two seconds each time). If the garage door cellaneous device follows the same procedure as pro-
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro- opener motor operates, programming is complete. gramming to a garage door opener page 48. Be
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con- non-rolling code before beginning the programming
programming additional buttons. firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If process.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position. the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 48 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49

NOTE: HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. NOTE:

Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit- Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators ○ If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of are designed to time-out in the same manner. ming is complete and the garage door/device
transmission, which may not be long enough for It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling should activate when the HomeLink® button is
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. process to prevent possible overheating of the garage pushed.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators door or gate motor. ○ To program the two remaining HomeLink® but- 2
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro- tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
cedure may need to be performed multiple times to 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® NOTE: If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
buttons. programming, plug it back in at this time.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Make Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
sure while programming HomeLink® with the (Canadian/Gate Operator)
Button engine on that your vehicle is outside of your To reprogram a channel that has been previously
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been garage, or that the garage door remains open at all trained, follow these steps:
previously trained, without erasing all the channels, times.
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code. program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position, without light in view. Do not release the button.
starting the engine. 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has follow all remaining steps.
20 seconds. Do not release the button. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when Security
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 fully trained. It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door in your vehicle.
Opener” and follow all remaining steps. 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
garage door may open and close while you are channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States erased.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after programming.
several seconds of transmission: 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
and observe the indicator light. the Vehicle Security system is active.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 49 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Troubleshooting Tips EXTERIOR LIGHTS

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions: Headlight Switch
• Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand- The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
held transmitter. instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
• Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
to complete the training for a rolling code. parking lights, instrument panel lights, and fog lights
(if equipped).
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
[Link] for information or assistance. Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)

WARNING! 1 — Rotate Headlight Control

2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage 4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death. NOTE:
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
Headlight Switch
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
while you are programming the universal trans- switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1 — Rotate Headlight Control light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2 — Push Front Fog Light Control ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
required by Federal safety standards. This includes 4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
most garage door opener models manufactured engaged.
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 50 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch Multifunction Lever • On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that
steering column.
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position. ard warning lights are activated).
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch 2
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel High/Low Beam Switch
lights position to the AUTO position for automatic head- Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
lights. Rotate to the second detent to turn on head- panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
lights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will
operation. turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams
off.
NOTE: Multifunction Lever
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and The Automatic High Beam Headlight system provides
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. If Equipped increased forward lighting at night by automating high
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever beam control through the use of a digital camera
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must the engine is running, and the low beams are not on. mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
be followed. The lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses the OFF or ON/RUN position, or the parking brake is
engaged. The low beams must be used for normal vehicle is out of view.
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap nighttime driving. NOTE:
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: • The Automatic High Beam Headlight system can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto
CAUTION! • For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running Dim High Beams” within Uconnect Settings
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, fog lights are turned on. page 168.
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the • The headlight switch must also be turned to the
lenses. • If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle AUTO position after Automatic High Beams is
was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system enabled within Uconnect Settings for the feature to
page 168. activate.
• Automatic High Beams will only activate when the
vehicle speed is above 22 mph (35 km/h).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 51 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail- Parking Lights And Panel Lights Headlight Illumination On Approach
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel When enabled, the headlights, exterior door handle
lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off pocket lights (if equipped), and interior lights will illumi-
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the wind-
the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to nate when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed
shield or camera lens will cause the system to func-
the O (off) position. as the operator is approaching the vehicle. This feature
tion improperly.
can be turned on/off, and the length of time the head-
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlight NOTE: lights stay on can be programmed for up to 90 seconds
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight within Uconnect Settings page 168.
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
dealer. detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How- This feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect
Flash-To-Pass ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti- system, and is activated when the operator approaches
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The the driver’s door, passenger’s door, or liftgate with a
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is valid key fob on their person. Some exterior and interior
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
engaged. lights will illuminate in order to provide an increased
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
sense of welcome and security as the operator
remain on, until the lever is released.
Headlights On Automatically With approaches the vehicle in the dark. “Headlight Illumina-
Automatic Headlights Wipers
tion On Approach” must be selected and set to a time
value other than zero within Uconnect Settings for Prox-
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it imity Wake-Up to activate.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, also has this customer-programmable feature. When The doors may be locked or unlocked for this feature to
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the your headlights are in the automatic mode and the activate, as long as the ignition is in the OFF position, or
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight engine is running, they will automatically turn on when during a Remote Start event. It will not activate if the
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable doors are locked and the ignition was placed in the
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the through the Uconnect system page 168. ON/RUN position.
ignition into the OFF position. The headlight time delay
can be programmed to 0/30/60/90 seconds within the NOTE: NOTE:
Uconnect system page 168. When your headlights come on during the daytime, the Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the following
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the conditions:
switch out of the AUTO position. instrument panel needs to be dimmed page 54.
• After numerous consecutive activations, in order to
NOTE: conserve the vehicle’s battery
The engine must be running before the headlights will • After the vehicle’s engine has been off for several
come on in the automatic mode. days

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 52 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

Headlight Animation — If Equipped Front Fog Lights — If Equipped The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is turned are on, or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
on, and set to a time value above zero, the exterior An indicator light located in the instrument cluster dis-
or the low beam headlights, and push the fog light but-
lights illuminate in a theatrical manner during approach play will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog
ton on the headlight switch.
to the vehicle. This feature is activated in the following lights will turn off when the button is pushed a second
situations: time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected. 2
• Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated Cornering Lights
• Remote Start is activated The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
• The unlock button on the key fob is pushed night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
NOTE: incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote Start side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the
or with the push of the unlock button, “Greeting Lights” turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through
the Uconnect system page 168.
must also be selected within the Uconnect system.

Headlight Delay Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a head- Fog Light Button
on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show
light delay that will leave the headlights on for approxi-
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
mately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position while the headlight NOTE:
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the
a very fast cluster turn indicator flash rate, check for a
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
defective outside light bulb.
the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: Lane Change Assist — If Equipped

The headlight delay time is programmable through Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
Uconnect Settings page 168. moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound when the driver’s door is opened.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 53 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlight Leveling — FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS — DIMMER CONTROLS

If Equipped IF EQUIPPED The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to the
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering The overhead console lights can also be operated indi- headlight switch located on the left side of the instru-
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling vidually as reading lights by pushing the corresponding ment panel.
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam buttons. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch. right dimmer control upward will increase the bright-
ness of the instrument cluster lights. Rotating the left
Battery Saver dimmer control will adjust the interior light levels of the
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shed- ambient lighting on the instrument panel and doors.
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights. Certain ambient lights may be color customizable
page 55.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and any door
is left ajar for 10 minutes or the overhead console
Dome On switch is left on for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.

NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. Courtesy Lights
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn 1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and 2 — Dome Defeat Button
left on for eight minutes while the ignition is in the OFF 3 — Ambient Light
position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off. 4 — Dome ON Button
Dimmer Controls
INTERIOR LIGHTS REAR COURTESY/READING LIGHTS
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
Courtesy Lights Located above the rear passenger seating in both sec- 2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
ond and third rows, along the trim, are courtesy/
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front reading lights. The courtesy lights turn on when a door
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is pushed on or the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on
the overhead console. If your vehicle is equipped with when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn
the reading light button to turn these lights on while
on. When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
inside the vehicle. Push the reading light button a sec-
pressing the Dome Defeat button on the overhead con-
ond time to turn each light off.
sole will cause all of the interior lights to turn off.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 54 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55

MULTICOLOR AMBIENT LIGHTING — WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND

IF EQUIPPED WASHERS
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
vehicle can be selected within the Apps menu on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
radio screen, or within Uconnect Settings operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
page 168. Brightness is adjusted using the ambi- 2
lever.
ent light dimmer control on the headlight switch.
Five colors can be selected for the following two zones
inside of the vehicle:
• Zone 1:
○ Instrument panel decorative ambient lights
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) • Zone 2:
○ Front seat footwell areas below the instrument
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control panel
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control ○ Lighting below the second row seats
○ Map pocket lighting on all four door panels
NOTE: These areas can be set to different colors, or if the
SYNC button is selected within the settings menu, all
• Multicolor ambient lighting for first and second colored lights will be set to the same color Multifunction Lever
rows, and overhead white ambient lighting in the
second and third row (if equipped) seating areas, automatically.
may not be equipped in the vehicle. 1 — Pull For Front Washer
NOTE: 2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
• Adjusting the right dimmer control all the way All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will 3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
upward will switch the radio screen to Light theme, remain white, and the ambient light dimmer control 4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
while moving the control all the way down will switch switch will adjust all ambient lighting at the same time. 5 — Push Up For Mist
the radio screen to the Dark theme.
• The dimming of lighting linked to the headlight sta- Windshield Wiper Operation
tus (i.e. radio screen brightness) is programmable The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
through the Uconnect system page 168. the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within
the lever all the way down to OFF.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 55 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
• As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked switch is released the pump will resume normal of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, operation. positions to activate this feature.
and the blades cannot return to the parked position, The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
damage to the wiper motor may occur. • If the front window washer feature is activated, all of windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is
the front cameras (if equipped) on the vehicle will
be washed as well. the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is
INTERMITTENT WIPER SYSTEM the most sensitive.
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions WARNING! NOTE:
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or wiper switch is in the low, high, or OFF position. Only
turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind- in one of the intermittent positions.
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a with the defroster before and during windshield • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of washer use. windshield.
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
MIST • Use of products containing wax or silicone may
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. reduce rain sensor performance.
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
NOTE: occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect system page 168.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), lever upward to the MIST position and release for a
delay times will be doubled. single wiping cycle. The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
WINDSHIELD WASHER OPERATION NOTE: following conditions:
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump; • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind- feature will not operate when the ignition is first
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several shield. The washer function must be used in order to placed in the ON/RUN position, when the vehicle is
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume spray the windshield with washer fluid. stationary and the outside temperature is below
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever For information on wiper care and replacement, see 32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the wind-
is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the page 281. shield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed
wipers will operate several cycles, then turn off. becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the out-
side temperature rises above freezing.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 56 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57

• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will NOTE: Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
not operate when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, when the transmission gear
If equipped with a Back Up camera washer, when the And Functions
rear window washer is activated, the Rear Back Up
selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle camera and Digital Rearview Mirror (if equipped) cam-
speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper eras are also washed.
control on the windshield wiper lever is moved, the
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped 2
gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped De-Icer feature that may be activated under the follow-
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers ing conditions:
are not operational when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the • Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case
vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the
of a cold weather manual start with full front
ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can
defrost, and when the ambient temperature is
resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
below 33°F (0.6°C).
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Temperature
Rear Wiper And Washer De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the Controls
rear defrost is turned on and when the ambient tem-
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
perature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward • Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient tem-
to the first detent for intermittent operation perature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
and to the second detent for continuous rear Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
wiper operation. resume its previous operation. If the Windshield
Rear Window Washer Operation Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward will continue.
activates the rear window washer. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting, CLIMATE CONTROLS
the wiper will turn on and operate for several The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
is pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display Temperature
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the Controls
wiper will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off. radio.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 57 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MAX A/C BUTTON recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate Control
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming, system will return to the previous setting. MAX Defrost
Press and release to change the current set- automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
ting. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to REAR DEFROST BUTTON
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature
may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create Press and release the button on the touch-
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
fogging on the inside of the windshield. screen, or push and release the button on
will turn off. Pressing other setting buttons will also
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
cause the MAX A/C to turn off. AUTO BUTTON defroster and the heated outside mirrors
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates
The AUTO button automatically controls the
performance. when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
interior cabin temperature by adjusting dis-
tribution and amount of airflow. Air Condi- defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the tioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO
touchscreen. operation to improve performance. Performing this CAUTION!
function will cause the system to switch between
A/C BUTTON manual mode and automatic modes page 62. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. the heating elements:
Press and release the button on the touch-
screen or push and release the button on the MAX DEFROST BUTTON
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
Push the MAX Defrost button to change the
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on. a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The
RECIRCULATION BUTTON indicator illuminates when this feature is on. heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
Performing this function will cause the auto- soaking with warm water.
Press and release the Recirculation button
on the touchscreen or push and release the
matic climate controls to change to manual mode, and • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
the following settings will occur: sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
button on the faceplate to change the sys-
tem between recirculation mode and outside • The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on) window.
air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside con- • The rear blower is off • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are • The air conditioning compressor is turned on (A/C
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recir- LED off) REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
culation may be unavailable if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. • Both driver and passenger temperature controls are Press and release this button on the climate
set to HI control touchscreen to access the rear climate
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of Recircu- • Defrost mode is selected (LED on) controls. The Rear Climate indicator will illumi-
lation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window • Rear defroster is turned on (LED on) nate when the rear climate controls are ON.
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not • The air recirculation is turned off (LED off)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 58 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59

DRIVER AND PASSENGER TEMPERATURE • When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate BI-LEVEL MODE
SWITCHES control settings will need to be adjusted manually to
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
achieve desired comfort. See page 60 or
These switches provide the driver and passenger with page 61 for more information. and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
independent temperature control. directed through the defrost and side win-
Lift the driver’s or passenger’s side toggle
BLOWER CONTROL dow demister outlets.
Blower Control is used to regulate the
2
switch on the faceplate upward, or press and NOTE:
slide the temperature bar towards the red amount of air forced through the Climate Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer Control system. There are several blower provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
temperature settings. speeds available. air from the floor outlets.
Depress the driver’s or passenger’s side Blower speed can be controlled by lifting blower toggle For more information on selecting modes, see
toggle switch on the faceplate downward, or on the instrument panel to increase blower speed, or page 60.
press and slide the temperature bar towards depress the toggle for lower blower speed.
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for The speed can also be selected using the blower con- FLOOR MODE
cooler temperature settings. trol buttons on the touchscreen. Press the blower bar Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
SYNC BUTTON area between the icons on the touchscreen. amount of air is directed through the defrost
MODE CONTROL and side window demister outlets.
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC buttons on the touchscreen, or the face- MIX MODE
is used to synchronize the front passenger plate, to change the airflow distribution Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
temperature and rear passenger temperature, mode, mode. The airflow distribution mode can be side window demister outlets. This setting
and blower settings with the driver temperature, mode, adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel out- works best in cold or snowy conditions that
and blower settings. Changing the front passenger tem- lets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. require extra heat to the windshield. This
perature or rear passenger temperature, mode, and setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this PANEL MODE
moisture on the windshield.
feature. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
NOTE:
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
• The SYNC setting is only available on the vanes of the center outlets and outboard
touchscreen. outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
• For vehicles equipped with the Four-Zone ATC sys- located next to the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
tem, the rear climate control settings (temperature, amount of airflow from these outlets.
blower speed, and mode) will change to match the
driver’s settings when the vehicle is first started,
without changing the SYNC status.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 59 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

COMBINE MODES CONTROLLING THE REAR CLIMATE CON- To change the rear system settings:
Dual Level Combination TROLS FROM THE FRONT ATC PANEL • Press the Rear button on the touchscreen to display
the rear climate controls. The control functions now
Front Defrost and Panel Mode operate the rear system.
Tri-Level Combination
Front Defrost, Panel Mode, and Floor Mode
• Press the Front button on the touchscreen to return
to the front climate controls.
The driver or front passenger can
combine two or three of the modes NOTE:
described by selecting them individu- If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left and
ally on their side of climate control right sides of the rear passenger zones can be adjusted
screen. Combine modes by pressing separately from the front or rear ATC panel.
each icon on the touchscreen. Rear Auto Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen to change the current setting. The
REAR AUTO indicator will illuminate when
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display REAR AUTO is on. This feature automatically
Rear Controls controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjust-
ing airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this func-
tion will cause the rear system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes page 62.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release this button to lock out the
CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
Press and release this button to turn the
settings. The LOCK REAR indicator will illumi-
Climate Control ON/OFF.
nate when LOCK REAR is on.
Front Climate Button
Press and release to return to the Front Cli-
mate Control Screen.
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Rear Controls

The Three-Zone and Four-Zone ATC system allows for

adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front
ATC panel.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 60 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61

SYNC Button Rear Mode Control Rear Climate Control OFF Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen The rear airflow distribution modes To manually set the rear blower controls to
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC can be adjusted so air comes from off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
indicator will illuminate when SYNC is on. the headliner outlets, the floor out- Off button.
SYNC is used to synchronize the front pas- lets, or both. Select the arrow icons
senger temperature and rear passenger temperature, individually on the front climate con- Rear Automatic Temperature Control 2
mode, and blower settings with the driver temperature, trol screen. Combine modes by
mode, and blower settings. Changing the front passen- pressing both icons.
ger temperature or rear passenger temperature, mode,
or blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit
this feature.

NOTE:
Headliner Mode
• The SYNC setting is only available on the
touchscreen. Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
• For vehicles equipped with the Four-Zone ATC sys- adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
tem, the rear climate control settings (temperature,
air vanes of the outlets to one side shuts off
blower speed, and mode) will change to match the
the airflow.
driver’s settings when the vehicle is first started,
without changing the SYNC status. Bi-Level Mode Rear Automatic Climate Controls
• When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate Press this button on the touchscreen to
control settings will need to be adjusted manually to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear
achieve desired comfort. See page 60 or Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both right side of the third row seats and overhead outlets at
page 61 for more information. the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. each outboard rear seating position. The system pro-
vides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehu-
Rear Blower Control NOTE: midified air through the headliner outlets.
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate the In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is The rear system temperature control buttons are
amount of air forced through the rear cli- designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner out- located on rear of the front center console.
mate system. There are several blower lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
speeds available. The speeds can be NOTE:
Floor Mode
selected using the blower bar area between the icons If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left and
on the touchscreen. Press this button on the touchscreen to right sides of the rear passenger zones can be adjusted
change the air distribution mode to Floor separately from the front or rear ATC panel.
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 61 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

AUTO BUTTON PANEL MODE Rear seat occupants can only adjust the rear ATC con-
trol when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
The AUTO button automatically controls the Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
off.
interior cabin temperature by adjusting dis- Each of these outlets can be individually
tribution and amount of airflow. Performing adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the The rear ATC is located on the rear of the front center
this function will cause the system to switch air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut console.
between manual mode and automatic modes off the airflow. • Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
page 62. front Uconnect touchscreen a second time to turn
BI-LEVEL MODE the Rear Temperature Lock icon off in the rear
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL Air comes from both the headliner outlets display.
These buttons provide the left and right side of the rear and the floor outlets. • Push a rear blower button, adjust the temperature
seating area with independent temperature control. using the rear up and down arrows, and select a
Push the Up button on the faceplate for control mode to suit the rear occupant’s needs.
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: • ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button on the
rear climate control faceplate.
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner out- Once the desired temperature is shown on the rear dis-
Push the Down button on the faceplate for lets and warmer air from the floor outlets. play, the ATC System will automatically achieve and
cooler temperature settings. maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up
FLOOR MODE for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the
Air comes from the floor outlets. settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by
simply allowing the system to function automatically.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Use the blower button with the down arrow Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
to reduce the blower setting, and the blower
button with the up arrow to increase the REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK AUTOMATIC OPERATION
blower setting. The rear blower setting is The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the 1. Push the AUTO button on the front Automatic Tem-
shown in the display. rear display is illuminated when the rear con- perature Control (ATC) Panel and the word “AUTO”
REAR MODE CONTROL trols are locked by the front system. will illuminate in the front ATC display, along with two
temperatures for the driver and front passenger. The
Push the rear mode button to adjust airflow system will then automatically regulate the amount
distribution. The rear mode settings are Rear Lock
of airflow.
shown in the rear display. The rear airflow Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
distribution mode can be adjusted so air Uconnect touchscreen will illuminate a lock symbol in 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
comes from the headliner outlets, the floor outlets, or the rear display. The rear temperature and air source maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and
both. are then controlled from the front Uconnect system. rear temperatures. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 62 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be VACATION/STORAGE
is not necessary to change the settings. You will used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
the system to function automatically. seats or steering wheel if equipped.
period of time, see page 317.
NOTE: Operating Tips WINDOW FOGGING
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. 2
The system automatically adjusts the temperature, Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as CAUTION! and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
possible. Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic Control system through an intake grille, located in the
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel, OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by just behind the rear doors. Do not block or place
changing the front blower knob setting. objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
MANUAL OPERATION OVERRIDE damage to the blower motor. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
This system offers a full complement of manual over- and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
will be turned off when the system is being used in the NOTE: intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
manual mode. Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug- CABIN AIR FILTER
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
NOTE: The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
The system will not automatically sense the presence of SUMMER OPERATION from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must The engine cooling system must be protected with a your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
be manually selected to clear the windshield and side high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- needed.
glass. sion protection and to protect against engine overheat- STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recom-
Climate Voice Recognition mended. For more information, see page 323. While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every- WINTER OPERATION Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead (if
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- engine running condition.
vehicle is equipped with climate controls).
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the fol-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
lowing commands:
centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
• “ Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees” Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
• “ Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees” mended, because it may cause window fogging.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 63 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER — IF EQUIPPED OPERATING TIPS CHART INTERIOR STORAGE AND
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element EQUIPMENT
located at the base of the windshield. WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
It operates automatically once the following conditions Set the mode control to Storage
are met:
(Panel Mode), GLOVE COMPARTMENT
• Activation By Front Defrost (MAX A/C) on, and blower
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automati- on high. Roll down the The glove compartment is located on the passenger
Hot Weather And Vehicle
cally during a cold weather manual start with full windows for a minute to side of the instrument panel.
Interior Is Very Hot
defrost, and when the ambient temperature is flush out the hot air.
below 33°F (0.6°C). Adjust the controls as
• Activation By Rear Defrost needed to achieve
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automati- comfort.
cally when the Rear Defrost is operating and the Turn (A/C) on and
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C). Warm Weather set the mode control to
• Activation By Remote Start Operation (Panel Mode).
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside Operate in (Bi-Level
Cool Sunny
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C) the Mode).
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Set the mode control to
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
Cool & Humid Conditions (Floor Mode) and
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
turn (A/C) on to Glove Compartment Release Handle
and operation will continue.
keep windows clear.
Set the mode control to To open the glove compartment, pull the release
(Floor Mode). If wind- handle.
Cold Weather shield fogging starts to
occur, move the control
to (Mix Mode).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 64 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65

FRONT CENTER CONSOLE SUNGLASSES BIN DOOR REAR FULL CENTER CONSOLE —
The front center console contains both an upper and a At the front of the console a compartment is provided IF EQUIPPED
lower storage area. for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage The rear full center console contains both an upper and
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the upper compartment access is a push/push design. Push the a lower storage area.
paddle release lever. chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad
To open the lower storage compartment, pull the lower
on the door to close. 2
paddle release lever.

Rear Center Console

Sunglasses Bin Door
1 — Console Cupholders
Storage Compartment Release Levers 2 — Open Lower Storage Area
3 — Covered Storage Compartment
1 — Upper Compartment Release Lever
2 — Lower Compartment Release Lever To open the covered storage compartment, pull the
upper paddle release lever on the front of the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the release levers to access The storage compartment may also be lifted forward.
the lower storage compartment. Pull the paddle release lever located on the back of the
console lid.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 65 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped Sun Screens — If Equipped

On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped Sun screens are available for the second row seating
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and
front passengers. the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that
the sun screens attach to when pulled up.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Con-
tinue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top
of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Rear Paddle Release Lever
When the second row seats are folded flat, lifting the
console forward provides a flat load floor surface from
the cargo area. There is also access to the storage com-
partment from the third row. Light Ring In Front Cupholder

The rear cupholders may also be equipped with a light

CAUTION! ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passen-
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders gers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Controls
or devices with cords routing through upper storage page 54.
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is Sun Screen Extended
lifted forward.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.

Light Ring In Rear Cupholder (If Equipped)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 66 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67

USB/AUX Control CONNECTING AUX OR THE EXTERNAL USB

This feature allows an external USB device to be DEVICE
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the center Use a connection cable to connect an external USB
stack of the instrument panel. device to the vehicle’s USB port, or use an auxiliary
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will acti- cable to connect a device to the vehicle’s AUX port.
vate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if Both are located below the climate controls. 2
equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.

NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and Center Arm Rest Rear Seat Entertainment USB Ports —
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one If Equipped
port can transfer data to the system at a time.
1 — USB C Port
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
2 — USB A Port (Standard USB)
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use. NOTE:
If the device’s battery completely discharges, it may not
The following messages will appear when a non-phone USB/AUX Ports communicate with the Uconnect system until a mini-
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
mum charge is attained. Leaving the device connected
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller
1 — USB C Port to the USB port may charge it to the required level.
and larger USB ports:
2 — USB A Port (Standard USB)
• “A new device is now connected. Previous connec- 3 — AUX Port USING THIS FEATURE
tion was lost.” By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
• “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin • The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
was lost.” charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C system, and provides the artist, track title, and
• “Another device is in use through the same USB and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the album information on the radio display.
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the same time but cannot be used simultaneously while
second device.” playing media. When both Type C and Type A charge- NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause only USB ports are in use they will be charged at a Depending on track configuration, track information
the connection to a previous device to be lost. reduced rate. may not be present on the radio display.
If equipped, in the center arm rest are USB ports for • The device can be controlled using the radio buttons
Rear Seat Entertainment. Both the USB A (Standard to play and browse the contents of the device.
USB) and USB C port can be used as a media source
for the rear screens.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB port.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 67 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

By using an auxiliary cable to connect an external NOTE:

device:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s • All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
sound system. The Uconnect system will not display
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
information related to the artist, track title, and
discharge.
album information.

NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13 Amp) at 12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
When using the AUX port, the external device cannot be rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
controlled using the radio buttons. The device will not needs to be replaced.
charge.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Radio
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets
Instruction Manual. Third Row USB Ports as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
SECOND AND THIRD ROW USB PORTS Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
1 — Charge Only Type C USB Port not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The second row USB ports can be used to charge an 2 — Charge Only Type A USB Port The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
external device.
on the center stack of the instrument panel, below the
NOTE: climate controls.
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.

Electrical Power Outlets

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
Center Console Rear USB Ports powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN Front Power Outlet
In the third row, a set of two USB ports can be used to position, while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol
charge a device. These ports are charge only. are connected directly to the battery and powered at all
times.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 68 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69

The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear

cargo area when the vehicle is equipped with third row CAUTION!
seating. When the vehicle is equipped with only two row
seating, the cargo area outlet is located on the left side • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
trim panel. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will 2
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
Power Inverter
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
Rear Cargo Power Outlet (Third Row Seating) erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
NOTE: inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overload-
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed from bat- Power Inverter — If Equipped ing the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical
devices prior to using the inverter.
tery powered to powered by ignition in the ON/RUN
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on
position by switching the cargo area power outlet fuse
the back of the center console to convert DC current to
from F44B to F44A in the rear power distribution center
AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, elec- WARNING!
page 288.
tronics and other low power devices requiring power up To avoid serious injury or death:
to 150 W. Certain video game consoles exceed this
WARNING! power limit, as will most power tools.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
To avoid serious injury or death: • Close the lid when not in use.
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. tric shock and failure.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 69 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped LED Indicator Status: • Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
• No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a is connected to a wired charger.
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi® • The phone’s protective case must be removed when
standard. placed on the wireless charging pad.
• Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging. • iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
• Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign object is ware to protect the device from overheating. When
detected. the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
down to protect the device.
• Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information). • Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
that its charging parts connect with the charging
Charging Pad:
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
• The presence of the Near-Field Communication charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies. • Having multiple applications open on the phone
Wireless Charging Pad while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in and may even shut down an application that is
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wire- order for the phone to charge. actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
less charging pad located below the center stack, • To avoid interference with the key fob search, the cause the phone to overheat.
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
• Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during charg-
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging running. ing such as slowing down the rate of charge. In cer-
of your mobile phone.
• Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display tain instances, the device may shut down for a brief
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on period of time (when the device reaches a certain
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless the wireless charging pad. temperature). If this happens, it does not mean
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a spe- there is a fault with the wireless charging pad. This
cialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
• If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light may just be a protective measure to prevent dam-
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please and placed back on the charging pad to resume age to the phone.
see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
charging. • The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
• Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip is connected to a wired charger. Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In this
indicator light. • If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light case, it is recommended to connect the system
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in using the USB port.
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning charging. • Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
will prevent the phone from charging. magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 70 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71

• With a compatible device placed on the charging NOTE: Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
pad, and the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, a For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, lift the
reminder message may appear on the instrument • The power window switches remain active for up to window switch up to the second detent, and release;
cluster display to warn the driver. 10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door will can- the window will go up automatically.
cel this feature. To stop the window from going all the way up during the
CAUTION! Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. 2
• The window controls will operate only when the vehi- To close the window part way, lift the window switch
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad cle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Plac- • The power windows may be operated from outside For vehicles equipped with anti-pinch protection, if the
of the vehicle by using the key fob. For more infor- window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
ing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
mation, see page 18. will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting. the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
WARNING! the window.
WINDOWS Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do NOTE:
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
Power Window Controls the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
The power window controls, located on the driver's door accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
trim panel, operate the window movement for all four Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position. Occu- the window manually.
power windows. pants, particularly unattended children, can become
There is a single switch on the front passenger door entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in seri- WARNING!
and rear passenger doors which operates the windows
for only that door. ous injury or death. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Both the driver and front passenger windows, and
if equipped, both rear windows, may have Auto-Down
and Auto-Up operations. RESET AUTO-UP
Auto-Down Feature Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, push the may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
window switch down to the second detent, release, and Front Doors
the window will go down automatically.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
To stop the window from going all the way down during pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Driver’s Door Power Window Switches switch briefly.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 71 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Doors Wind Buffeting

WARNING!
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com- Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
additional two seconds after the window is closed. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
2. Release the window switch, and within five seconds, accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless
pull the window switch up again for an additional open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
two seconds. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buf- become entrapped by the power sunroof while
feting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim ment may result in serious injury or death.
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
push and release the window lockout button (the indi-
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
cator light on the button will turn on). To enable the win- also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
dow controls, push and release the window lockout but- Single Pane Power Sunroof — your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
ton again (the indicator light on the button will turn off). If Equipped gers are also properly secured.

The power sunroof switches are located on the over- • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
head console between the courtesy/reading lights.
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF

Express Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push OPEN on the sunroof switch
and release it within one-half second and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position.
To close the sunroof, push CLOSE on the sunroof switch
Power Window Lockout Switch and release it within one-half second and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
Power Sunroof Switches
other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 72 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73

Manual Open/Close SUNSHADE OPERATION Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped

To open the sunroof, push and hold OPEN on the sun- The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the The power sunroof switches are located on the over-
roof switch. sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. head console between the courtesy/reading lights.
To close the sunroof, push and hold CLOSE on the sun-
roof switch. NOTE:
Any release of the switch during open or close opera- The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. 2
tion will stop the sunroof movement in a partially open IGNITION OFF OPERATION
position. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held again. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
Express Venting The Sunroof
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
To vent the sunroof, push TILT on the vent switch and will cancel this feature.
release within one half second. The sunroof will open to
the vent position regardless of its initial position. During NOTE:
Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
switch will stop the sunroof. Uconnect system page 168.
Power Sunroof Switches
NOTE: SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express/ 1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
Manual Open or Vent operation is initiated, the sun- 2 — Venting Sunroof
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
shade will automatically open with the sunroof glass. 3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of WARNING!
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
tion if this occurs. the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless
NOTE: Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and become entrapped by the power sunroof while
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 73 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Open/Close If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot

WARNING! be closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the
To open the sunroof, push and hold OPEN on the sun-
sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown roof switch. The sunroof will open to the comfort stop
vented and the sunshade is at half open position will
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could position, then automatically stop. Release the switch
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten then push and hold again to continue to the full open first automatically close the sunroof prior to the sun-
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- position. shade closing.
gers are also properly secured. To close the sunroof, push and hold CLOSE on the sun- Express Open/Close
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. roof switch. To open the sunshade, push OPEN on the sunshade
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any Any release of the switch during open or close opera- switch and release it within one-half second, the sun-
object, to project through the sunroof opening. tion will stop the sunroof movement in a partially open shade will open to the half open position and stop auto-
Injury may result. position. matically. Push and release OPEN again to continue to
open the sunshade to the full open position.
Express Venting The Sunroof
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF To close the sunshade, push CLOSE on the sunshade
To vent the sunroof, push TILT on the vent switch and
switch and release it within one-half second.
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for release within one half second. The sunroof will open to
the vent position regardless of its initial position. During During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
the sunroof open position: a comfort stop position and other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
a full open position. The comfort stop position will mini- Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the sunroof. sunshade in a partially open position.
mize wind buffeting in the interior.
Manual Open/Close
Express Open/Close NOTE:
To open the sunshade, push and hold OPEN on the sun-
To open the sunroof, push OPEN on the sunroof switch If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express/ shade switch, the sunshade will open to the half open
and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will Manual Open or Vent operation is initiated, the sun- position and stop automatically. Push and hold OPEN
open to the comfort stop position and stop automati- shade will automatically open to the half open position again to continue to open the sunshade to the full open
cally. Push and release OPEN again to continue to the prior to the sunroof opening. position.
full open position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER SUN- To close the sunshade, push and hold CLOSE on the
To close the sunroof, push CLOSE on the sunroof switch
and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will SHADE sunshade switch.
close automatically from any position. Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
will stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any half open and full open positions. When operating the
other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will
sunroof. always stop at the half open position regardless of
express or manual open operation. The switch must be
pushed again to continue on to full open position.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 74 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75

PINCH PROTECT FEATURE HOOD NOTE:

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
Opening The Hood • Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an must be in PARK.
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the To open the hood, two latches must be released.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- • While lifting the hood, use both hands.
1. Pull the release lever located at the bottom of the 2
tion if this occurs.
driver’s side of the instrument panel. • Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Closing The Hood
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
of the hood with moderate force until the angle is below
IGNITION OFF OPERATION the crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
its own inertia.
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. WARNING!
NOTE: Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
Hood Release when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Uconnect system page 168.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE 2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, injury or death.
move the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks. LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate
The power liftgate may be opened by push-
ing the liftgate button on the key fob or by
pushing the electronic liftgate release
button.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is
open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a
Safety Latch Location second time will close the liftgate.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 75 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the lift-
gate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by pushing
the electronic liftgate release button and pulling
upward in one fluid motion.
Liftgate Entry Liftgate Close Button
To Lock/Close The Liftgate
1 — Passive Entry Button There are several different ways to close the liftgate: Adjustable Power Liftgate Height
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button • Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle and pull in The maximum height that the liftgate will open can be
a downward motion) adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only open to
NOTE: • Key fob the desired height. To set a desired height, proceed as
When you push the electronic liftgate release button, follows:
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and
• Hands-free (if equipped)
• Liftgate close button in the cargo area 1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull down on
the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected set- the liftgate to the desired height.
ting in the Uconnect system page 168. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry button located to 2. Push and hold the liftgate close button, located on
NOTE: the left of the electronic liftgate release button, will lock the left side trim panel inside the cargo area, for
the vehicle only. three seconds. An audible chime will be emitted to
• Use the power door lock switch on either front door If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by let you know the height has been saved.
trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate. pushing the liftgate close button located in the cargo To set the saved height setting to a new setting, pro-
area on the left rear trim panel, near the liftgate open- ceed as follows:
• The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock or unlock ing. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate close
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the liftgate
the liftgate. button a second time will reverse the liftgate operation.
upward to its full open position.
2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new desired
height and hold the liftgate close button for three
seconds until the audible chime is emitted.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 76 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77

Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure: Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped NOTE:

1. In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, • Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
the liftgate can be released by accessing the service a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
release feature in the latch. This can be done using the liftgate handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
a 3 mm diameter screwdriver. not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond
to any kicks. 2
• The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system page 168.
• The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned
off during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash,
and vehicle service.
• The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated by
any metallic object making a similar in-and-out
motion under the rear fascia/bumper, such as
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone cleaning using a metal broom.
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activa- • The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
Liftgate Service Release tion, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the
vehicle activation zone in the general location below • If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. Place the rear license plate. The activation zone is about is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
the screwdriver in the eyelet. 1.8 ft (0.5 m) from side to side. Do not move your foot reverse to the closed/open position, provided it
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may meets sufficient resistance.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever
and release the latch.
not detect the motion. • There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, NOTE: these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset The activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped open position.
with or without a trailer tow package.
power liftgate functionality. • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstruc-
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate tions within the same cycle, the system will auto-
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate matically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
will open after approximately one second, or close after operated manually.
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through Uconnect Settings
• The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
page 168. remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 77 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of Cargo Area Features
time (approximately one hour), the liftgate may need
to be closed manually to reset power liftgate CARGO STORAGE
functionality. The load floor is designed for a maximum load of
300 lb (136 kg).
WARNING! If equipped, there may be a removable storage bin
located on the left side of the rear cargo area.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
Additional storage can be found under the storage lid.
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the To access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. the storage lid.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the Tie-Down Hooks (Vehicles With Third Row Seating)
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

However, because the gas pressure drops with tem-
perature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.

NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate Lift Storage Lid Handle
obstacle detection feature and stop the power opera-
tion or reverse its direction. CARGO TIE-DOWN HOOKS
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area sides, Tie-Down Hooks (Vehicles Without Third Row Seating)
WARNING! should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving.
During power operation, personal injury or cargo WARNING!
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is NOTE:
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched The cargo tie-downs are designed for a maximum load • Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
before driving away. seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
of 300 lb (136 kg). tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 78 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79

To cover the cargo area: FOLDABLE CARGO AREA COVER —

WARNING!
1. Grab the cover at the center handle and pull over IF EQUIPPED
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers the cargo area. The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying pur-
slots in the pillar trim cover. passengers from loose cargo.
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in 2
seats and use seat belts. 3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can place.
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
Foldable Cargo Area Cover
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed To cover the cargo area:
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the 1. Remove the folded cover from the storage pouch,
vehicle to sway. Rear Cargo Cover and unfold using a twisting motion.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of 2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become slots on each side of the pillar trim.
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or WARNING!
accident. In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
RETRACTABLE CARGO AREA COVER — strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
IF EQUIPPED ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.

Step 2

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 79 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Hook the straps to the outside post of the rear head ROOF LUGGAGE RACK —
restraint on each side.
IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry loads
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load
must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be uni-
formly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE:
See an authorized dealer to order and install Mopar®
crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack cross-
Folding The Cargo Cover bars. The roof rack does not increase the total load car-
rying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of
Step 3 1 — Remove Cover From Vehicle cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack
2 — Twist Cover does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
NOTE: 3 — Push Twisted Cover Inward Place one crossbar in the forward position. Place the
The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in 4 — Place Folded Cover In Pouch rear crossbar in one of the two rear optional positions
place. based on the load being secured.
To store the foldable cargo area cover, reverse the To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located
WARNING! at the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
installation steps and replace the cover into its storage
pouch. turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
Mopar® crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired posi-
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
tion, retighten with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
position.
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 80 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81

NOTE:
CAUTION!
If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over the
satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experi- • Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
ence interruption of satellite radio reception. For as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
improved satellite radio reception, place the rear cross- frontal area should be secured to both the front
bar in the forward of the two rear crossbar positions. and rear of the vehicle. 2
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
WARNING! fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the This is especially true on large flat loads and may
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per- result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. • The use of vehicle systems that would adjust the
ride heights (such as Selec-Terrain modes Rock or
Sand/Mud) is not recommended when using the
Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load
appropriately.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 81 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 82

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 82 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83

Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Dis- 3. Tachometer

play controls located on the steering wheel will allow WARNING!
you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
○ Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth- minute (RPM x 1000).
Use this QR code to access your digital ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool- 4. Fuel Gauge
experience. ant. It is recommended to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats page 283. ○ The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
Scan me
CAUTION!
○ The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel 3
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam- door is located.
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
NOTE:
DESCRIPTIONS the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illumi-
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on nate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first
1. Speedometer the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an cycled.
○ Indicates vehicle speed. authorized dealer for service.
2. Temperature Gauge
○ The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○ The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 83 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ANALOG INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 84 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85

Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Dis- 4. Fuel Gauge

play controls located on the steering wheel will allow WARNING!
you to change your display from Analog to Digital.
○ The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth- tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool- the ON/RUN position.
ANALOG INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ant. It is recommended to call an authorized dealer ○ The fuel pump symbol points to the
DESCRIPTIONS for service if your vehicle overheats page 283. side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
1. Tachometer
○ Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per NOTE:
CAUTION! 3
minute (RPM x 1000). The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illumi-
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam- nate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first
2. Speedometer
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” cycled.
○ Indicates vehicle speed. pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
3. Temperature Gauge the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
○ The temperature gauge shows engine coolant the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
temperature. Any reading within the normal
authorized dealer for service.
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○ The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 85 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Menu Button
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push the Menu button to access/select the informa-
Depending on your vehicles trim level, features and wheel:
tion screens or submenu screens of the Home
options may vary. Screen display. Push and hold the OK button to
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster enter edit mode.
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
4. Left Arrow Button
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the Push the left arrow button to return to the main
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instru- menu from an info screen or submenu item.
ment cluster display is designed to display important
5. Down Arrow Button
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru- Push and release the down arrow button to
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show scroll downward through the main menu.
you how systems are working and give you warnings
6. Right Arrow Button
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted con-
trols allow you to scroll through the main menus and Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons Push and release the right arrow button to
submenus. You can access the specific information you access the information screens or submenu screens
want and make selections and adjustments. of a main menu item.
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button Display Options
LOCATION AND CONTROLS 3 — Menu Button Holding OK will also allow you to change your display to
4 — Left Arrow Button Digital or Analog.
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button • Digital theme will be the default theme
• Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press OK
1. Up Arrow Button to reactivate

Push and release the up arrow button to scroll

• Speedometer must always be present
upward through the main menu. • Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up info
will still be displayed in the main screen area (in this
2. OK Button case the speed moves to the top)
Push the OK button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of a main menu
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location item. Push and hold the OK button for one second
to reset displayed/selected features that can be
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen reset.
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 86 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87

Custom Tile Configuration arrow button to select a different screen within the • Driver Info — If Equipped
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are selected category. If the Menu button is pressed in this ○ Posted Speed Limit Sign
able to select up to five tiles to display information view, the instrument cluster will return to the previously ○ Driver Assist
displayed screen.
based on your needs. • Audio
• Press the Menu button for the Home Screen display. Home Screen Options ○ Audio Info
• Off Road
○ Selec-Terrain Status/ Air Suspension Status —
If Equipped
○ Steering Angle 3
○ Pitch & Roll
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.

Oil Change Required

Menu Button Custom Tile Screen Your vehicle is equipped with an engine Scan me
oil change indicator system. The “Oil
• Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired NOTE: Change Required” message will display
Tile. These options may vary based on your vehicle trim in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the level. single chime has sounded, to indicate the next sched-
• uled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator
selected submenu and press OK again to add your • Navigation — If Equipped system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
selection to your tile view. ○ Map Display change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
• The Home Screen options are Driver Info, Vehicle ○ Trip A/B personal driving style.
Info, Navigation, Audio, and Off Road. • Vehicle Info Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
○ Coolant Temp
Home Screen ○ Trans Temp time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
Press the Menu button to display the Home Screen. ○ Oil Temp OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
Push and release the left or right arrow button
○ Oil Pressure system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
to highlight the desired selection. Push and release the
○ Battery Voltage refer to the following procedure.
OK button to select. Press the up or down
○ Oil Life
○ Tire Pressure
○ Fuel Economy

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 87 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life The instrument cluster display will normally display the
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display con- main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
trols for the following procedure(s): main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
messages and warning or information messages. These
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
pop-up messages fall into several categories:
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). within 10 seconds.
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
2. Push and release the down arrow button to 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE message takes control of the main display area for
scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the five seconds and then returns to the previous
Info”. OFF position. screen. Most of the messages of this type are then
3. Push and release the right arrow button to stored (as long as the condition that activated it
NOTE: remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Mes-
access the “Oil Life” screen.
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the sages” main menu item. Examples of this message
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If con- vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and
ditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will necessary, repeat this procedure. “Low Tire Pressure”.
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine must be DISPLAY AND MESSAGES • Unstored Messages
off with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life The instrument cluster display is located in the center the condition that activated the message is cleared.
screen. portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections: Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illu- (if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
5. Push and release the up or down arrow but-
minate in black under normal conditions, yellow for leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
ton to exit the submenu screen.
noncritical warnings and red for critical warnings • Unstored Messages Until RUN
NOTE: • Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus These messages deal primarily with the Remote
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the available, the position within the submenus is Start feature. This message type is displayed until
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If shown here the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
necessary, repeat this procedure. • Reconfigurable Telltales/Information message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
• Gear Selector Status (PRND) Start”.
• Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to • Five Second Unstored Messages
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time) When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
• Air Suspension Status — If Equipped five seconds and then returns to the previous
• Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped screen. An example of this message type is “Auto-
matic High Beams On”.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 88 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89

Includes the following, but not limited to:

Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
Doors Open Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Traction Control Off
Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low
Hood Open Oil Change Due Fuel Low
Shift Not Allowed Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control
Service Shifter Service Power Steering Cruise Off 3
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Cruise Ready ACC Override
Service Transmission Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h Close Fuel Door
Liftgate Open Vehicle Not In Park Service Tire Pressure System
Door Open Park Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low
Service Air Bag Warning Light Lights On Engine Temperature Hot
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Service Air Bag System Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open Ignition On Check The Rear Seat
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Door Open

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the

white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green
or red telltales area on the right.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 89 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Driver Assist — If Equipped • Oil Pressure

While viewing the Speedometer menu title, push and Displays the actual oil pressure.
MENU ITEMS release the left or right arrow button until the
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the Driver Assist menu title is displayed in the instrument
• Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the battery.
main menu items for several features. Use the up cluster display. The Driver Assist screen indicates the
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the current status of ACC, Active Lane Management and Oil Life
driver interactive display menu options until the desired Active Driving Assist/Assist+/Pilot. Push and release • Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
menu is reached. the OK button again to change between Zoomed In and Tire Pressure Monitor System
Zoomed Out view (“Press OK to Zoom In” will display
NOTE: when in Zoomed Out view/“Press OK to Zoom Out” will • If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
display when in Zoomed In view).
may vary. the icon.
VEHICLE INFO • If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
Main Menu Push and release the up or down arrow button To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and the tire
until the Vehicle Info title is highlighted in the instru- pressure values in each corner of the icon with the
DRIVER INFO ment cluster display. Push the left or right arrow pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a dif-
Push and release the up or down arrow button button to scroll through the information submenus. ferent color than the other tire pressure value.
until the Drive menu title is displayed in the instrument Fuel Economy • If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Ser-
cluster display. vice Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Speedometer
• Average Fuel Economy Tire Pressure is an information only function, and can-
Push and release the up or down arrow button
• Current Fuel Economy not be reset page 217.
until the Speedometer menu title is displayed in the • Range To Empty Stop/Start Status — If Equipped
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK • Press the OK button to reset the average fuel • Display current status of Stop/Start system.
button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of the speedom- economy
eter. Hold the OK button to toggle between Analog and TRIP
NOTE:
Digital speedometer. Push and release the up or down arrow button
The Range feature is not able to be reset through the
Night Vision — If Equipped instrument cluster display controls. until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument
While viewing the Speedometer menu title, cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow but-
Gauge Summary ton to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will
push and release the left or right
arrow button until the Night Vision menu title • Coolant Temperature — If Equipped display the following:
is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Displays the current temperature of the coolant. • Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) trav-
Pedestrian/Animal icons will be displayed in the top left
location page 149.
• Transmission Temperature eled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Displays the actual transmission temperature. • Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
• Oil Temperature Trip B since the last reset.
Displays the actual oil temperature.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 90 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91

• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of STORED MESSAGES Favorite Menus
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Push and release the up or down arrow button Driver Info Trip Off Road
Hold the OK button to reset feature information. until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This fea- (Show/Hide) (Show/Hide)
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ture shows the number of stored warning messages.
Vehicle Info Navigation Messages
Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow
Push and release the up or down arrow button you to see what the stored messages are. (Show/Hide) —
until the Navigation display title is highlighted in the If Equipped
instrument cluster display. SETTINGS Audio Settings HUD
OFF ROAD — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: (Show/Hide)
3
The Head Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped feature Set-
Push and release the up or down arrow button NOTE:
tings are available at any vehicle speed page 91.
until the Off Road Menu title is highlighted. Push the Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to
left or right arrow button to scroll the Screen Setup choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
submenus. Push and release the up or down arrow button instrument cluster display.
until the Settings Menu title is highlighted in the instru-
• Terrain Status — If Equipped ment cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
○ Selec-Terrain Status • Restore
○ Air Suspension Status enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the
• Vehicle Dynamics
screen as needed. The Settings feature allows you to • Cancel
change what information is displayed in the instrument
○ Wheel Articulation cluster as well as the location that information is HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) —
○ Transfer Case Status — If Equipped displayed.
○ Steering Angle IF EQUIPPED
○ Sway Bar Status — If Equipped Upper Left or Upper Right Use this QR code to access your digital
○ Axle Lock Status — If Equipped experience.
None Fuel Economy Time
• Pitch And Roll Current
○ Vehicle Pitch
○ Vehicle Roll Outside Temp Trip B Distance Fuel Economy NOTE:
Average The HUD feature Settings are available Scan me
AUDIO
Range To Empty Compass Trip A Distance at any vehicle speed. Some information
Push and release the up or down arrow button (RTE) like speed limit or Driver Assist may not appear on the
until the Audio Menu title is highlighted in the instru- HUD unless your vehicle is equipped Traffic Sign Assist
ment cluster display. This menu will display the audio Current Gear or Driver Assist systems.
source information, including the Song name, Artist • On Push and release the up or down arrow button
name, and audio source with an accompanying graphic. • Off until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
Odometer instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
• Show or right arrow button until the HUD Menu icon/
title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
• Hide

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 91 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push and release the OK button to enter HUD. Use the When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD • Display Height
up or down arrow button to select a setting, image is split into thirds with the speed limit • Brightness
then push and release the OK button to adjust the indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the
setting. center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right. NOTE:
• ON/OFF ○ Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management, • The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display Height and
Active Driving Assist), Gear (available in Sport Non Custom layouts), are controlled through the Set-
mode) tings Screen in the Instrument Cluster page 86.

NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will not
display while in the Settings menu.

BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY

SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
HUD ON/OFF ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will display This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
on the windshield. When it is not selected, it will not sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
display on the windshield. cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
Advanced Mode
• Content and Layout In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
○ Simple: Speed, Speed Limit When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, elec-
○ Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga- trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is
current gear. done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential
○ Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit electrical loads.
○ Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation Load reduction is only active when the engine is run-
○ Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management, depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
Active Driving Assist) to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
○ Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver current drive cycle.
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist), Gear (available in Sport When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
mode) Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
Standard Mode

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 92 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93

These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low • Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge parking periods).
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. • The vehicle was parked for an extended period of The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
time (weeks, months). ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
NOTE:
• The battery was recently replaced and was not acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
• The charging system is independent from load charged completely. indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos- considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
tic on the charging system continuously.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
on when the vehicle was parked.
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi- • The battery was used for an extended period with refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a 3
cate a problem with the charging system the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char- failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
page 94. gers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
The electrical loads that may be switched off cleaners, game consoles and similar devices. ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be What to do when an electrical load reduction action status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
affected by load reduction: message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel Saver Mode”) RED WARNING LIGHTS
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors During a trip:
• HVAC System • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: Active Driving Assist - Driver
• 115 Volt AC Power Inverter System ○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) Inattentiveness Warning Light
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets This light illuminates when driver inattentive-
• Audio and Telematics System +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports ness has been continually detected, warning
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of ○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) the driver to place their hands on the steer-
the following conditions: ○ Check the audio settings (volume) ing wheel.
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electri- After a trip:
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed Air Bag Warning Light
cal loads are larger than the capability of the charg- (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
ing system. The charging system is still functioning This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
properly. any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents). four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. • Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, tion. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a
time and parking time).
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, • The vehicle should have service performed if the until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on dur-
towing, frequent stopping, etc.). message is still present during consecutive trips,
and if the evaluation and driving pattern of the ing startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- vehicle did not help to identify the cause. system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi- possible.
lar devices.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 93 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Brake Warning Light Door Open Warning Light

WARNING!
This warning light monitors various brake This indicator will illuminate when a door is
functions, including brake fluid level and Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger- ajar/open and not fully closed.
parking brake application. If the brake light ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
turns on it may indicate that the parking take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE:
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
reservoir. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
If the light remains on when the parking brake has (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Warning Light
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. This warning light will turn on when there's a
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked fault with the EPS system page 119.
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault WARNING!
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
may be felt during each stop. light inspected by an authorized dealer. Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking The light also will turn on when the parking brake is safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. obtained as soon as possible.
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which NOTE:
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
cylinder has dropped below a specified level. It does not show the degree of brake application. Light
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
Battery Charge Warning Light problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
NOTE: This warning light will illuminate when the detected while the vehicle is running, the
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering battery is not charging properly. If it stays on light will either stay on or flash depending on
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The while the engine is running, there may be a the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake malfunction with the charging system. Con- vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
fluid level checked. tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. mission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is This indicates a possible problem with the electrical turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
necessary. system or a related component. your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 94 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95

NOTE: Liftgate Open Warning Light Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped- This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
This warning light will illuminate when the
als are pressed at the same time. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
liftgate is open.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run-
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi-
Oil Temperature Warning Light
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or This warning light will illuminate to indicate
NOTE:
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
Night Vision Animal Warning Light for oil temperature to return to normal levels. 3
have the system checked by an authorized dealer. The Night Vision Animal Warning Light will
illuminate in red when an animal is detected Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning directly in the vehicle’s path, near the head- — If Equipped
Light lights, and a collision is possible
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
page 149.
This warning light warns of an overheated unbuckled in the second row. When the igni-
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may tion is first placed in the ON/RUN position,
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem-
display when a detection occurs. and if a seat belt in the second row is
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light will turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light cluster display, momentarily replacing the configurable
able to cool; whichever comes first. will illuminate in red when a pedestrian is corner information. If a second row seat belt that was
detected directly in the vehicle’s path, near buckled at the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
the headlights, and a collision is possible Seat Belt Reminder Light will change from the buckled
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
page 149. to the unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may page 221.
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi- display when a detection occurs.
ately and call for service page 265. Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light This warning light indicates when the driver
Hood Open Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
This warning light will illuminate when the low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
hood is left open and not fully closed. while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the position and if the driver’s seat belt is
engine as soon as possible, and contact an unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
turns on. remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
NOTE: flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single page 221.
chime.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 95 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Transmission Temperature Warning YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a Active Driving Assist - Driver inspected by an authorized dealer.

high transmission fluid temperature. This Inattentiveness Warning Light Electric Park Brake Fault Warning Light
may occur with strenuous usage such as This light illuminates when driver inattentive- This warning light will illuminate to indicate
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the ness has been detected, warning the driver the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with to place their hands on the steering wheel. properly and service is required. Contact an
the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the authorized dealer.
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may con-
tinue to drive normally. Active Driving Assist Fault Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
This light will turn on when the Active Driving Warning Light — If Equipped
WARNING! Assist system has detected a fault.
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans- system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you the instrument cluster will come on when the
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact Air Suspension Fault Warning Light ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,
and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire. This light will illuminate when there is a fault engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
detected in the air suspension system. continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
CAUTION! vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Light rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. This warning light monitors the ABS. The diagnosed and corrected.
light will turn on when the ignition is placed • The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
in the ON/RUN or position and may stay on Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
Vehicle Security Warning Light — for as long as four seconds. placed in the ON/RUN position.
If Equipped If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security functioning and service is required as soon as possible. will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
system is arming, and then will flash slowly However, the conventional brake system will continue to • This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
until the vehicle is disarmed. operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is event.
not also on.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 96 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
WARNING!
Warning Light — If Equipped If Equipped
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
This warning light indicates the ESC is off. This warning light will illuminate when the
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, windshield washer fluid is low page 276.
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
the ESC system will be on, even if it was you drive slowly or park over flammable substances
turned off previously. such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
Service Active Lane Management Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light (MIL) 3
This warning light will illuminate when the The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Active Lane Management system is not oper- Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnos- CAUTION!
ating and requires service. Please see an tic System called OBD II that monitors
authorized dealer. engine and automatic transmission control Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
systems. This warning light will illuminate when the igni- (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
Active Lane Management Warning Light tion is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive-
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
— If Equipped switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
The Active Lane Management Warning Light checked promptly. service is required.
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
approaching a lane marker. The warning poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
light will flash when the vehicle is crossing engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light Night Vision Animal Warning Light
the lane marker page 144. stays on through several typical driving styles. In most The Night Vision Animal Warning Light will
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light require towing.
illuminate in yellow when an animal is
approaching or is in the vehicle’s path
This warning light will illuminate along with a When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert page 149.
dedicated message on the display if a prob- serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
lem is detected with the Fuel Level Sensor. If power or severe catalytic converter damage. The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
this light comes on see an authorized dealer vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
immediately. soon as possible if this occurs. will illuminate in yellow when a pedestrian is
Low Fuel Warning Light approaching or is in the vehicle’s path
page 149.
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on
until fuel is added.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 97 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Service 4WD Warning Light — Sway Bar Fault Warning Light As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
If Equipped This light will illuminate when there is a fault
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi-
This warning light will illuminate to signal a in the sway bar disconnect system
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays page 115.
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
on or comes on during driving, it means that your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
the 4WD system is not functioning properly proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
and that service is required. We recommend you drive Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
to the nearest authorized dealer and have the vehicle Warning Light ure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
serviced immediately. The warning light switches on and a mes- tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire stopping ability.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) pressure is lower than the recommended Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
Warning Light value and/or that slow pressure loss is tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
This light will turn on when the ACC is not occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
operating and needs service page 121. consumption may not be guaranteed. has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
mentioned, the display will show the indications corre- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
sponding to each tire. function indicator to indicate when the system is not
Service Forward Collision Warning operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(FCW) Or Pedestrian Emergency Braking WARNING! combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(PEB) Warning Light — If Equipped Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as approximately one minute and then remain continu-
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
fault in the FCW or PEB System. Contact an avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
authorized dealer for service page 215. occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
as possible. low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
Service Stop/Start System Warning occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
Light — If Equipped Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
This warning light will illuminate when the
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
and service is required. Contact an autho-
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
rized dealer for service.
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 98 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99

Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —

CAUTION!
Indicator Light— If Equipped If Equipped
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
This light will illuminate when the air suspen- The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will illu-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
sion system is set to the Aerodynamic setting minate if a fault is detected, it will be indi-
have been established for the tire size equipped on
page 116. cated by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator light that
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
will stay on as long as the fault condition
damage may result when using replacement equip-
exists.
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Light— If Equipped Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or 3
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper- This light will illuminate when the vehicle is Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec- automatically lowered from ride height posi- OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho- tion downward for easy entry and exit of the This indicator light illuminates to indicate
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked. vehicle. that FCW or PEB is off page 215.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS Light — If Equipped
Max Payload Exceeded Indicator Light
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will illuminate when the air suspen-
sion system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting This light indicates that the maximum pay-
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is page 116. load may have been exceeded or load level-
in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear ing cannot be achieved at its current ride
driveshafts are mechanically locked together height.
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear Light — If Equipped NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
This light will illuminate when the air suspen- This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
wheels page 112.
sion system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — page 116. and the front and rear driveshafts are disen-
gaged from the powertrain.
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspen- Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
sion system is actively adjusting the ride This indicator light will illuminate when the
height page 116. front sway bar is disconnected
page 115.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 99 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
If Equipped — If Equipped
Active Driving Assist - Driver Attentive This indicator light will illuminate when the This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
Indicator Light cruise control is set to the desired speed been buckled in the second row. A telltale
This light will turn on when the system page 121. will display in the upper right corner of the
detects that the driver is attentive and is instrument cluster display to correspond to
actively steering the vehicle. the specific seating position once the seat belt has
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped been buckled page 221.
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With front fog lights are on page 50. Sport Mode Indicator Light
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected page 121. Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
The Active Lane Management indicator light
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With illuminates solid green when both lane mark- If Equipped
No Target Detected Indicator Light — ings have been detected and the system is This indicator light will illuminate when the
armed and ready to provide visual and Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
If Equipped torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure page 119.
This will display when the ACC is set and the occurs page 144.
vehicle in front is not detected
page 121. Night Vision Active Indicator Light — Turn Signal/Hazard Indicator Lights
If Equipped When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the Night
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
Vision Warning System status is Active
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a complete page 149. signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
stop without you having to keep your foot on activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
the brake pedal. Once engaged a green (left) or up (right).
“HOLD” indicator will appear in the Instru- Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light NOTE:
ment Cluster Display.
This indicator light will illuminate when the • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
parking lights or headlights are turned on driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
page 50. signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 100 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101

WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Light — If Equipped
Active Driving Assist On Indicator Light This light indicates when the rear passenger Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the system is seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in — If Equipped
turned on, but is not actively providing steer- the upper right portion of the instrument This light alerts the driver that the Night
ing to the vehicle. cluster display, momentarily replacing the Vision Warning System status is Suppressed
configurable corner information page 205. page 149.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — 3
Indicator Light — If Equipped If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been This light will turn on when Selec-Speed Con-
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
turned on, but is not set page 121. trol is activated. Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
To activate Selec-Speed Control, ensure the Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
vehicle is in 4WD Low and push the button the performance of the emissions, engine, and trans-
on the Instrument Panel page 116. mission control systems. When these systems are oper-
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-
This indicator light will illuminate when the NOTE: mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
cruise control is ready, but not set If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed well within current government regulations.
page 121. Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
display. tem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS to assist your service technician in making repairs.
Light — If Equipped Although your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
This indicator shows when the HDC feature
High Beam Indicator Light need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate soon as possible.
is turned on. The light will be on solid when
HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when that the high beam headlights are on. With
the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position the low beams activated, push the multifunc- CAUTION!
and the vehicle speed is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). If tion lever forward (toward the front of the
these conditions are not met while attempting to use vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc- • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to ther damage to the emission control system. It
on/off. turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
“flash to pass” scenario. tests can be performed.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 101 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ○ The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss then return to being fully illuminated until you
will soon occur. Immediate service is required. In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control sys- means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM For states that require an Inspection and
station.
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the ○ The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is function- illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection position or start the engine. This means that
ing and is not on when the engine is running,
port to allow access to information related to the perfor- your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
mance of your emissions controls. Authorized service can proceed to the I/M station.
technicians may need to access this information to Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
and emissions system page 168. serviced, or had a depleted battery or a battery replace- authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
WARNING! vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con- you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
tioned test routine may then indicate that the system is
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in now ready.
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your following:
vehicle. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the not crank or start the engine.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior NOTE: before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
tracking device, it may: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety this test over. running.
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
accident involving serious injury or death. position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
○ Access, or allow others to access, information (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- check.
sonal information.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 102 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 103

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GRAND WARNING! KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked IGNITION
CHEROKEE vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the cause serious injury or death. switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their compartment.
seat belts. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK NORMAL STARTING
4
WARNING! (P) position before you can start the engine. Apply the To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
brakes before shifting into any driving gear. Button
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com- 1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake. CAUTION! 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
• Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the ing precautions are not observed: 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle and vehicle is locked. • Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or NEUTRAL vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
into any forward gear when the engine is above
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
idle speed.
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or a complete stop. button again.
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at Button
selector. idle speed.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
in a location accessible to children, and do not is firmly on the brake pedal. release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key- 2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
move the vehicle. START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
(Continued) three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 103 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 104 STARTING AND OPERATING

off. The ignition will remain in the ON/RUN position NOTE: If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle. engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
pushed twice to the OFF position. Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure met:
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
message will display in the instrument cluster
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument clus- • Vehicle is not in PARK
ter will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and page 82.
the engine will remain running. Never leave a • Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. AUTOPARK NOTE:
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with plac- For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
NOTE: ing the vehicle in PARK (P) should the situations on the will turn off and the ignition switch will change to the
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE following pages occur. It is a back-up system and ON/RUN position. After 30 minutes the ignition
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle should not be relied upon as the primary method by switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. the ignition switch OFF.
and the ignition will remain in the ON/RUN position. If
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
outlined on the following pages. vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
vehicle may AutoPark page 104.
AutoPark.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL WARNING! AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
Position) met:
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ON/RUN, your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not • Vehicle is not in PARK
and START. To change the ignition positions without blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster • Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
these directions: is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position. added precaution, always apply the parking brake • Driver’s door is ajar
when exiting the vehicle. • Brake pedal is not pressed
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place The message “ AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift
the ignition in the ON/RUN position. • AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
To Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the NOTE:
to return the ignition to the OFF position.
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 104 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 105

If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle EXTENDED PARK STARTING
may AutoPark. WARNING!
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is NOTE: • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less. Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
The message “ Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” not been started or driven for at least 30 days. start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle causing serious personal injury.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the bat-
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). tery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
cycle. started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
WARNING! transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button once. the engine has started, ignite and damage the con-
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait verter and vehicle.
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left 10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster 4
in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added pre- repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure. cables may be used to obtain a start from a
caution, always apply the parking brake when exiting booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
the vehicle. 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then
erly page 263.
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle
CAUTION! CAUTION!
in 4WD LOW.
The message “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con- To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
the instrument cluster. tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
10 to 15 seconds before trying again. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK IF ENGINE FAILS TO START COLD WEATHER OPERATION
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
• Driver’s door is ajar “Normal Starting” procedure and has not experienced (BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
The message “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis- an Extended Park condition as defined previously, it
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the of an externally powered electric engine block heater
to the floor and hold it there while the engine is crank-
driver’s door is closed. (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
ing. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in is flooded. The starter motor will engage automatically,
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
AFTER STARTING
display and on the gear selector. As an added precau- occurs, release the accelerator pedal and brake pedal, The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Start- decrease as the engine warms up.
vehicle. ing” procedure.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 105 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 106 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS PARKING BRAKE To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages.
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE
Warning Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or operation, and some additional features that make the pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. parking brake more convenient and useful. a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is
traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the OFF but the BRAKE Warning Light will not illuminate,
throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and vehicle, make sure the parking brake is applied. Also, however, it can only be released when the ignition is in
should be avoided. be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. the ON/RUN position.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil NOTE:
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
• Manually, by applying the parking brake switch. The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur • Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea- is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
ture in the Customer Programmable Features sec- released or applied position. The light will extinguish
page 277.
tion of the Uconnect settings. upon releasing the switch.
The parking brake switch is located on the instrument If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
CAUTION! panel to the left of the steering wheel (below the head- brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
Never use non-detergent oil or straight mineral oil in lamp switch). sion is placed into PARK. If your foot is on the brake
the engine or damage may result. pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
NOTE: ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE,
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should to drive away.
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot
with the engine oil indicator often during the break-in
on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down
period. Add oil as required.
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in the
Electric Park Brake Switch brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged, the BRAKE Warning Light in the instrument clus-
ter and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 106 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 107

NOTE: In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB sys-

WARNING! tem, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
may be accompanied by the BRAKE Warning Light
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB system
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other- injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll vehicle stationary.
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of and cause damage or injury.
PARK. AUTO PARK BRAKE
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automati-
WARNING! CAUTION! cally whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
enabled and disabled by customer selection through
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully the customer programmable features section of the 4
when parked to guard against vehicle movement tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
Uconnect Settings page 180.
and possible injury or damage. an authorized dealer immediately.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
• When exiting the vehicle, always turn the ignition
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while
OFF, secure the key fob, and lock your vehicle. the transmission is placed in PARK.
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE SAFEHOLD
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num- Warning Light will illuminate, and a continuous chime SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated place the transmission in PARK, and engage the park-
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to automatically while the vehicle remains in motion. ing brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
selector. To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a The parking brake will automatically engage if all of the
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or complete stop using the parking brake, when the following conditions are met:
in a location accessible to children, and do not vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n parking brake will remain engaged.
• The vehicle is at a standstill.
Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could operate • There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
power windows, other controls, or move the accelerator pedal.
vehicle. WARNING! • The seat belt is unbuckled.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or • The driver door is open.
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
failure and a collision. may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be sure EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once manu-
(Continued) the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; fail- ally bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the
ure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is
turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 107 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 108 STARTING AND OPERATING

HOLD ‘N GO — IF EQUIPPED BRAKE MAINTENANCE MODE WARNING!

Hold ‘N Go is a comfort feature that allows the driver to We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
remove their foot from the brake pedal once the vehicle authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for You can be badly injured working on or around a
has come to a stop. The vehicle must be held at a which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
standstill for a predetermined amount of time by You should only enter Brake Maintenance mode during have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
hydraulic braking. The EPB will then engage and con- brake service. have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
tinue to hold the vehicle at a stop until the driver job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
applies the accelerator pedal. Hold ‘N Go can be acti- for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
vated or deactivated by pushing the HOLD button the rear caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can
located on the switch bank. only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. Fortu- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
nately, actuator retraction can be done easily by enter-
ing the Brake Maintenance mode through the Uconnect You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
Settings in your vehicle. This menu-based system will out of PARK.
guide you through the steps necessary to retract the
EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service. WARNING!
Maintenance mode has requirements that must be met
in order to be activated: • Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
• The vehicle must be at a standstill. fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
• The parking brake must be unapplied. vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
While in Maintenance mode, the EPB Warning Light will if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
HOLD Switch flash continuously while the ignition is ON. transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
When brake maintenance work is complete, the follow- brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
The following conditions must be met for Hold ‘N Go to ing steps must be followed to reset the parking brake is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
activate: system to normal operation: • The transmission may not engage PARK if the
• Driver’s door is closed • Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
• Driver's seat belt is fastened • Press the brake pedal with moderate force. that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
• Vehicle is at a standstill • Apply the EPB Switch. idly indicates PARK without blinking. Ensure that
• Forward gear is selected the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK
• ACC is not engaged position is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
• EPB is not applied
(Continued)
• ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto parking
maneuver is not activated

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 108 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 109

WARNING! CAUTION!
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N) Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If ing precautions are not observed: This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only after the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in the vehicle has come to a complete stop. brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
or DRIVE (D) when the engine is above idle speed.
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, 8-SPEED AUTOMATIC
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK TRANSMISSION 4
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P) gear selector located on the center console. The trans-
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. mission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a
vehicle against unwanted movement. vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
the ignition is in the OFF position. PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or mov-
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. ing at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
NOTE: once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with The transmission will NOT shift out of the PARK position selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to if the engine is not running even when the brakes are range for normal driving.
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num- applied. Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously the ignition is OFF (not in the ON/RUN position) before NOTE:
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to exiting the vehicle. In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans- position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
mission gear selector. driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or will blink continuously until the selector is returned to
in a location accessible to children), and do not the proper position, or the requested shift can be
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child completed.
could operate power windows, other controls, or The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
move the vehicle. shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions. The transmission elec-
tronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 109 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 110 STARTING AND OPERATING

on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a Gear Ranges

normal condition, and precision shifts will develop CAUTION!
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear range. • Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is NOTE: the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow selector could result.
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual damage the drivetrain.
downshifts can be made using the steering wheel PARK (P)
mounted paddle shifters. Pulling the -/+ switches (on This range supplements the parking brake by locking The following indicators should be used to ensure that
the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will the transmission. The engine can be started in this you have properly engaged the transmission into the
select the highest available transmission gear, and will range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in PARK position:
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
3, etc. Some models will display both the selected gear vehicle in this range. • When shifting into PARK, rotate the shifter all the
limit, and the actual current gear, while in AutoStick way counterclockwise until the indicator displays
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before PARK.
mode. shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill • Look at the transmission gear position display and
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake. • With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
• Shift the transmission into PARK. REVERSE (R)
• Turn the ignition OFF.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle. REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
NOTE: stop.
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer NEUTRAL (N)
case is in a drive position.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
Transmission Gear Selector
longed periods with the engine running. Apply the park-
ing brake and shift the transmission into PARK (P) if you
must exit the vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 110 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 111

torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmis- 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
WARNING! sion fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume once no longer detected, the transmission will return to
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni- the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable normal operation.
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices level.
NOTE:
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
Transmission Limp Home Mode Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
Transmission function is monitored electronically for that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
have a collision.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
could result in transmission damage, Transmission equipment to assess the condition of your
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the trans- transmission.
CAUTION! mission may operate only in certain gears, or may not If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely service is required.
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, 4
severe transmission damage. the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is AutoStick — If Equipped
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
For Recreational Towing see page 162.
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instru- providing manual shift control, giving you more control
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see page 267. ment cluster will inform the driver of the more serious of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
conditions, and indicate what actions may be braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
DRIVE (D) necessary. and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can also provide you with more control during passing,
This range should be used for most city and highway city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- trailer towing, and many other situations.
the following steps:
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. NOTE:
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- cates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
control to select a lower gear page 111. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve perfor- 1. Stop the vehicle.
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
sive shifting and heat buildup. not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
be modified depending on engine and transmission turns off.
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. AutoStick Paddle Shifters
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the 5. Restart the engine.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 111 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 112 STARTING AND OPERATING

Operation • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature.
To activate AutoStick mode, tap one of the paddle shift- AutoStick is enabled. When activated, the engine and transmission, steering
ers on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-) paddle shift- • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a and suspension (if equipped with air suspension) are all
ers to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmis- fault or overheat condition is detected. The vehicle set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide
sion to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter will force an upshift, but it will stay in AutoStick improved throttle response and modified transmission
AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The current mode. shift points as well as firmer suspension and steering
transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument for an enhanced driving experience. This mode may be
To disengage AutoStick mode, push and hold the (+)
cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the paddle activated and deactivated by pushing the SPORT ON
paddle shifters until "D" is once again indicated in the
shifters, to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the button on the instrument panel switch bank or by
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
(-) paddle shifters, will downshift the transmission to selecting SPORT Mode using the Selec-Terrain switch
mode at any time without taking your foot off the accel-
the next lower gear. Tapping the (+) paddle shifters, will (if equipped). When Sport Mode has been activated an
erator pedal.
upshift the transmission to the next highest gear. indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
WARNING!
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their The driveline is equipped with a Front Axle Disconnect
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as follows. grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or (FAD) for the one-speed and two-speed drivelines. The
FAD operation is fully automated and controlled by the
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the personal injury.
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM). It does not require
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear. any customer input to engage. The FAD is set to con-
nect, disconnect and provide 4WD function based on
• The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED certain set conditions detected by the DTCM, including
but not limited to the following:
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated. • Ambient temperature
• You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND • Wipers
gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in SEC- • Selec-Terrain mode selection
OND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be help- • Wheel-slip detection
ful in snowy or icy conditions.
The FAD is actuated only in 4WD HI range and stays
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to connected for 4WD LOW.
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle pressed, will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the cur-
rent speed.
SPORT Mode

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 112 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 113

QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING When additional tractive effort and torque are required, SHIFT POSITIONS
the 4WD LOW position can be used. The 4WD LOW
INSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS — position is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces For additional information on the appropriate use of
each four-wheel drive system mode position, see the
IF EQUIPPED only. Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-
following:
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) damage to driveline components.
transfer case, which enables on-demand four-wheel
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
4WD HI
drive with active torque management. No driver interac- This is the default operating range for daily use.
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
tion is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC) sys-
4WD HI position at a given road speed. Take care not to
tem, which combines standard ABS and Traction Con-
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph N (NEUTRAL)
trol, provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to
(40 km/h). This range disengages the driveline from the pow-
allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends ertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle behind another
NOTE: on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each vehicle page 162. 4
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for condi- wheel. Any difference will adversely affect performance
tions where 4WD LOW range is recommended and function of the transfer case. WARNING!
page 166. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the
INSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS — parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) posi-
WARNING!
IF EQUIPPED tion disengages both the front and rear drive shafts
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
The Quadra-Trac II system comes equipped with a even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
customer-selectable electronically operated on-demand the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the brake should always be applied when the driver is not
transfer case with active torque management in all in the vehicle.
driveable ranges. This transfer case provides the follow- parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) posi-
ing operating range positions: tion disengages both the front and rear drive shafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
• 4WD HI even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
4WD LOW
• N (NEUTRAL) brake should always be applied when the driver is not This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
• 4WD LOW in the vehicle. an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slip-
pery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 113 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 114 STARTING AND OPERATING

SHIFTING PROCEDURES 4WD LOW To 4WD HI QUADRA-TRAC II SYSTEM —

4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), IF EQUIPPED
the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine run-
ning, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), push and The Quadra-Trac II System features two torque transfer
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
hold the 4WD LOW button until the 4WD LOW Indicator couplings. The couplings include an Electronic Limited-
the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position and the
Light begins to flash in the instrument cluster. When Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
the shift is complete, the 4WD LOW Indicator Light will transfer case. The ELSD axle is fully automatic and
(N), push and hold the 4WD LOW button until the 4WD
remain off. requires no driver input to operate. Under normal driv-
LOW Indicator Light begins to flash in the instrument
ing conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle,
cluster. When the shift is complete, the 4WD LOW Indi-
NOTE: balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels.
cator Light will remain on solid.
With a traction difference between left and right
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met — “4WD wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference. As
Shift Canceled” or “4WD Shift Aborted/ Retry Shift” one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque
message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less
To reattempt shift, put the transmission in NEUTRAL traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the trans-
(N) and push and hold the 4WD LOW button. fer case and axle coupling differ in design, their opera-
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To Com- tion is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case
plete 4WD Shift Put Transmission In Neutral” or a shifting information, preceding this section, for shifting
“To Complete 4WD Shift Speed Must Be Below this system.
3 MPH” or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Allow Engine
To Return To Idle” message will flash from the
instrument cluster display page 86.

4WD LOW Button • Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
NOTE: occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To Com- clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to
plete 4WD Shift Put Transmission In Neutral” or a “To occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle roll-
Complete 4WD Shift Speed Must Be Below 3 MPH” or a ing 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is mov-
“To Complete 4WD Shift Allow Engine To Return To Idle” ing faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case
message will flash from the instrument cluster display will not allow the shift.
page 86.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 114 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 115

ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR NOTE: To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to 4WD LOW
If the electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar is and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road
DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED disconnected and then driven at speeds above 18 mph position page 112. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon- (29 km/h), the system will reconnect for driver safety. flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater The Sway Bar Indicator Light will continue to flash as disconnected.
front suspension travel in off-road situations. the system waits for the driver to slow the vehicle and
will automatically disconnect again unless the driver NOTE:
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to
located on the instrument panel (to the right of the gear cancels the request with the SWAY BAR switch. The sys-
tem can cancel the pending disconnect request if drive- left and right suspension height differences. This condi-
selector). tion is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
train changes are made (e.g. 4WD HI to 4WD LOW)
based on road conditions. loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the
bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that
WARNING! the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from 4
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before side to side.
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway again.
bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury. Under certain WARNING!
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists with vehicle If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
control. The system monitors vehicle speed and will mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in the
SWAY BAR Switch attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be
speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
the switch again to deactivate the system. The Sway vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), (29 km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar
Bar Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) the system will once again attempt to return to off- may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
will illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The Sway road mode. could result in serious injury.
Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation transition,
or when activation conditions are not met. The
stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road mode dur-
ing normal driving conditions.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 115 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 116 STARTING AND OPERATING

SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED • SAND/MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low • SPORT – This mode is only available in 4WD HI.
traction surfaces such as mud or sand. Driveline is When activated, the engine and transmission, steer-
maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on ing and suspension (if equipped with air suspen-
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls sion) are all set to their SPORT settings. SPORT
are set to limit traction control management of mode will provide improved throttle response and
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspen- modified transmission shift points as well as firmer
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the sion, the level will change to Off-Road 1 (OR1). suspension and steering, the vehicle will also be
best performance for all terrains. Tap the toggle up or dropped to Aero Height for an enhanced driving
down to cycle through the positions. • SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in inclem-
ent weather. Use on and off-road on loose traction experience. When SPORT mode has been activated,
surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode an indicator light will illuminate in the instrument
(depending on certain operating conditions), the cluster.
transmission may use SECOND gear (rather than
FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slip- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
page. If equipped with air suspension, the default MESSAGES
ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
• AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel drive
appear in the instrument cluster page 86.
operation can be used on and off-road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide
improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. If the suspension is already in OR1 or
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
OR2, the vehicle will not lower to NRH with Auto
Selec-Terrain selection as to maintain capability. DESCRIPTION
1 — Selec-Terrain Positions The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system provides full
2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle NOTE: time load leveling capability along with the benefit of
If equipped with air suspension, the level will only vehicle height adjustment by a toggle switch. The
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions: raise to Normal Ride Height (NRH) in the AUTO vehicle will automatically raise and lower the ride height
mode. If the vehicle is in OR1 or OR2 the height will
• ROCK – Off-road calibration is only available in 4WD not lower automatically until defined speed thresh-
to adapt to the appropriate driving conditions. At higher
speeds, the vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic ride
LOW. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with air sus-
olds are exceeded. height and when operating in off-road modes, the
pension) for improved ground clearance. Traction-
based tuning with improved steerability for use on vehicle will raise the ride height accordingly. The but-
high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed tons near the terrain switch in the center console area
obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. can be used to set preferred ride height to match the
If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will appropriate conditions.
change to Off-Road 2 (OR2). If the Selec-Terrain
switch is in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is
switched from 4WD LOW to 4WD HI, the Selec-
Terrain system will return to AUTO.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 116 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 117

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately NOTE:

1.6 inches [40 mm]) – This is the primary position Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit can
for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. Push the be enabled through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio
UP button once from the NRH position while the by selecting the “Auto Entry/Exit” setting. If this feature
vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the gear selec-
the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains tor is in PARK, the terrain switch is in AUTO, the trans-
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) fer case is in AUTO and the vehicle level is either in
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed Normal or Aero Height. The vehicle will not automati-
exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be auto- cally lower to Entry/Exit height if the air suspension
matically lowered to NRH page 166. level is in OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle is equipped with
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) 0.0 inches (0 mm) – Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be sup-
This is the standard position of the suspension and pressed when the ignition is switched OFF and the
is meant for normal driving. door is open to prevent setting the alarm off.
Quadra-Lift Switch 4
• Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change the
1 — Off-Road 2 Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer -0.8 inches [-21 mm] Front and -1.0 inches vehicle to the proper height based on the position of
Selectable) [-25 mm] Rear) – This position provides improved the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed
2 — Off-Road 1 Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle from the default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of
Selectable) will automatically enter Aero when the vehicle speed the air suspension buttons page 116.
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph The system requires that the engine be running for all
Selectable) (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors
4 — Aero Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while
Selectable) vehicle will return to NRH from Aero if the vehicle
5 — Entry/Exit Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed
speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and until the open door(s) is/are closed.
Selectable)
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system uses a lifting
6 — Toggle Switch
the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
The vehicle will enter Aero, regardless of vehicle
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Non-TrailHawk raises the vehicle speed if the vehicle is in SPORT mode.
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising
approximately 2.4 inches [60 mm]) (TrailHawk the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
raises the vehicle approximately 3.0 inches • Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
[75 mm]) – This position is intended for off-road use -1.8 inches [-46 mm] Front and -2.0 inches move down first and then the rear.
only where maximum ground clearance is required. [-50 mm] Rear) – This position lowers the vehicle
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
To enter OR2, push the UP button twice from the for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lower-
air suspension system operates briefly; this is normal.
NRH position or once from the OR1 position while ing the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and
The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to
vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit, push the
ensure a proper appearance.
OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph DOWN button twice from NRH while the vehicle
speed is below 4 mph (6 km/h). To exit Entry/Exit, To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift Air
(40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically Suspension system has a feature which allows the
lowered to OR1 page 166. push the UP button twice while in Entry/Exit or drive
the vehicle over 6 mph (10 km/h). automatic leveling to be disabled page 168.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 117 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 118 STARTING AND OPERATING

Default Ride Height Auto Entry/Exit Mode INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

• Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air sus-
MESSAGES
default for all vehicle speeds and operation. This is pension system has a feature which automatically low-
the selected height that the suspension will level for ers the vehicle to Entry/Exit ride height page 168. When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
speed changes (e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height appear in the instrument cluster page 86.
at speed, lowering from Off Road Height at speed, NOTE:
etc.). This mode is intended to be enabled with the ignition OPERATION
on.
• Default ride height can be changed by manually The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to show
adjusting the ride height switch to Normal Ride Transport Mode the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
Height or Aero Height and staying in the selected To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension sys- lamps will show a position which the system is working
height for 2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the tem has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/ to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
default ride height and the height will be maintained Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling sys- flashing while raising, the highest flashing indicator
until a new default ride height is selected. tem page 168. lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/ When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing while
disabling of air suspension features must be done NOTE: lowering, the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position
through the radio page 168. This mode is intended to be enabled with the ignition the system is working to achieve.
on. Toggle up once will move the suspension one position
WARNING! Suspension Display Messages Mode higher from the current position, assuming all condi-
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol- The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you tions are met (i.e. ignition on, speed below threshold,
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal to only display suspension warnings page 168. etc). Toggle up can be pushed multiple times. Each
injury or damage to the system, see an authorized toggle up will raise the requested level by one position
NOTE: up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest posi-
dealer for service.
This mode is intended to be enabled with the ignition tion allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
on. speed, etc).
AIR SUSPENSION MODES Wheel Alignment Mode Toggle down once will move the suspension one posi-
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to pro- Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must tion lower from the current level, assuming all condi-
tect the system in unique situations: be enabled page 168. tions are met (i.e. ignition on, doors closed, speed
Tire/Jack Mode below threshold, etc). Toggle down can be pushed mul-
NOTE: tiple times. Each toggle down will lower the requested
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension level by one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit
system has a feature which allows the automatic level- This mode is intended to be enabled with the ignition
on. Height or the lowest position allowed based on current
ing to be disabled page 168. conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
NOTE: disabling of air suspension features must be done
This mode is intended to be enabled with the ignition on. through the radio page 168.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 118 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 119

Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle NOTE:

speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator POWER STEERING
lamps and instrument cluster display messages will
The electric power steering system will provide
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operate the same for automatic changes and user operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
requested changes. increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverabil- Under these conditions there will be a substantial
ity. The electric power steering system adapts to differ- increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) Ride Height – Indicator lamps ent driving conditions. and during parking maneuvers.
1 through 5 will be illuminated.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) Ride Height – Indicator lamps WARNING!
• If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer
2 through 5 will be illuminated. for service.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
3 through 5 will be illuminated. safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Aero Ride Height– Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated. The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel con- 4
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
• Entry/Exit Ride Height– Indicator lamp 5 will be NOTE: during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
illuminated.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
• Transport Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be illumi- through the Uconnect system. Refer to page 168. pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
nated. Driving above 3 mph (5 km/h) or deselecting
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
setting in the radio will disable Transport Mode.
displayed and the “Service Power Steering” starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 through 5 will or the “Power Steering Assist Off – Service parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
be illuminated. Driving above 5 mph (8 km/h) or System” message is displayed within the
deselecting setting in the radio will disable Tire/Jack
Mode.
instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle AUTOSTOP MODE
needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 through Refer to page 93.
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
5 will be illuminated. Driving above 5 mph (8 km/h) If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed
or deselecting setting in the radio will disable Wheel into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are
and the “Power Steering System Over Temp” message
Alignment Mode. met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
is displayed on the instrument cluster display, this indi-
Autostop mode.
cates an over temperature condition in the power steer-
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY ing system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load
and message turn off. • The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
section page 86.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full func-
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
tionality after a battery disconnect.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 119 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 120 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the • Engine temperature is too high. TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
brake pedal pressed. • 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to from previous Autostop.
STOP/START SYSTEM
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi- • Steering angle is beyond threshold.
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
will be maintained upon return to an engine running
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
condition.
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the previously listed items.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many AUTOSTOP MODE
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
display Stop/Start screen. In the following situations,
engine restart.
the engine will not stop:
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto- Stop/Start OFF Switch
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. matically While In Autostop Mode:
• Driver’s door is not closed. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE. bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “Stop/
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold. • To maintain cabin temperature comfort. Start OFF” message will appear in the instrument clus-
• Battery charge is low. • HVAC is set to full defrost mode. ter display and the Autostop mode will be disabled
• The vehicle is on a steep grade. • HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually page 86.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an adjusted. NOTE:
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved. • Battery voltage drops too low. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower • Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed. mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back
• A Stop/Start system error occurs. ON.
speed.
• HVAC is set to MAX A/C. • Steering angle is beyond threshold. TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
• Engine has not reached normal operating STOP/START SYSTEM
temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
• Hood is open.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
• Accelerator pedal input.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 120 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 121

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) WARNING!

If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con- safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
system will not shut down the engine. A “Service Stop/ venience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on tions. Your complete attention is always required
Start System” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale highways and major roadways. However, it is not a while driving to maintain safe control of your
will appear in the instrument cluster display safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
page 86. ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
If the “Service Stop/Start System” message appears in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
the instrument cluster display, have the system need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar • The ACC system:
checked by an authorized dealer. sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a station-
a vehicle directly ahead of you.
ary vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS NOTE: ○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon 4
Your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive Cruise Con- • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will adverse sight distance conditions.
trol (ACC) system which will adjust the vehicle speed up apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed ○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
to the preset speed to maintain a distance with the the original set speed) automatically to maintain a conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
vehicle ahead. preset following distance, while matching the speed distance warnings.
of the vehicle ahead. ○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop and hold
NOTE: the vehicle in the stop position for approximately
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving Assist • Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to 10 minutes when following a vehicle ahead. If
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
(ADA) system: the vehicle ahead does not start moving within
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
10 minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
• Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used when ACC system.
and the ACC system will be canceled.
is not enabled, and functions as normal cruise
control. • In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving • You should not utilize the ACC system:
Assist system, Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not
• Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles enabled) will not detect vehicles directly ahead of
○ When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea- you. Always be aware of the feature selected
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
ture selected. page 329.
○ When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
• Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is WARNING! snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, downhill slopes.
and vice versa. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience ○ When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
system. It is not a substitute for active driver ○ When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility a constant speed.
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 121 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 122 STARTING AND OPERATING

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Driving Assist Menu Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel The instrument cluster display will show the current The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
operate the ACC system. system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active (32 km/h).
Lane Management (ALM), and the Active Driving Assist When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
(ADA) systems. The information it displays depends on the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
ACC, ALM, and ADA system statuses.
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
Pushing the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) buttons will will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
display one of the following messages in the instrument
cluster display: NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting • When in 4WD Low
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.” • When the brakes are applied
Adaptive Cruise Control Set • When the parking brake is applied
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the • When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
display will read “ACC: XX mph (km/h)”. NEUTRAL
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instru-
1 — Distance Increase Button
ment cluster display. • When the brakes are overheated
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel The ACC screen may display once again if any of the • When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
4 — Distance Decrease Button following ACC activity occurs: • When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
5 — SET (+)/Accel • System Cancel speeds
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume • Driver Override • When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
8 — SET (-)/Decel • System Off vehicle in close proximity
• ACC Proximity Warning • When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
• ACC Unavailable Warning mode is active
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Activate/Deactivate
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off”. Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
displays “ACC Ready.”
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity. To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster dis-
plays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 122 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 123

NOTE: The following conditions will only cancel the ACC

WARNING! Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below system:
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on 20 mph (32 km/h). • Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above • Driver door is opened at low speeds
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
You could lose control and have a collision. Always speed of the vehicle. To Turn Off
leave the system off when you are not using it. The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
NOTE:
memory if:
To Set A Desired Speed • Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond pushed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster • Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
instrument cluster display will show the set speed. display. • The ignition is placed in the OFF position 4
NOTE: • If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed • 4WD Low is engaged
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) is used without while ACC is enabled, the system will not be control- • The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system (if equipped)
ling the distance between your vehicle and the is enabled/engaged and the ADA button is pressed
ACC enabled. To change between Adaptive Cruise Con-
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
trol (ACC) and Fixed Speed Cruise Control features, first NOTE:
turn off ACC by pushing the ACC on/off button. Then, mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
If ADA is not enabled/engaged and the ADA button
turn on Fixed Speed Cruise Control by pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button. To Cancel is pressed, the ACC system will remain on or turn
on, depending on the state of ACC at the time of the
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed ADA button press.
Cruise Control systems:
WARNING!
• The brake pedal is applied To Resume
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity • The CANC (cancel) button is pushed If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound • The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE (resume) button and remove your foot from the accel-
position erator pedal. The instrument cluster display will show
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
the last set speed.
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to tem (ESC/TCS) activates Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
• The vehicle parking brake is applied being used.
selected. • The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (0 km/h) when ACC is active.
(overheated)
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 123 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 124 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Metric Speed (km/h) Setting The Following Distance In ACC

• While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a • Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subse- varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
complete stop longer than two seconds, the driver
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
will either have to push the RES (resume) button or
1 km/h. (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
press the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC
system. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears in the
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary the button is released. The new set speed is instrument cluster display.
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. reflected in the instrument cluster display.

WARNING! NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
The Resume function should only be used if traffic (-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed of the vehicle.
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and When ACC Is Active
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to • When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
follow these warnings can result in a collision and engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
death or serious personal injury. sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
To Vary The Speed Setting stop when following the vehicle in front. If your Distance Settings
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
after two seconds the driver will either have to push 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push- 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed. 3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
ing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving 4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
• Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift- To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subse- ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending Increase button and release. Each time the button is
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
1 mph. maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down- (longer).
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem- To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the perature exceeds normal range (overheated). Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
the instrument cluster display. (shorter).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 124 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 125

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain Overtake Aid

the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in WARNING!
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide
the ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to
the system will adjust the vehicle speed automatically objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
assist in passing the vehicle. This additional accelera-
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set these warnings can result in a collision and death or
tion is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
speed. serious personal injury.
signal and will only be active when passing on the left
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: hand side.
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the Display Warnings And Maintenance
set speed. ACC Operation At Stop
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill “WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
the sensor. while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
VEHICLE” WARNING 4
• The distance setting is changed. resume motion, without any driver interaction, if the
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
vehicle ahead starts moving within two seconds of your
• The system disengages page 122. vehicle coming to a standstill. warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how- tions temporarily limit system performance.
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
necessary. seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
NOTE: or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys- the existing set speed. as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus-
tem applies the brakes. ter display will display the previously listed message
NOTE: and the system will deactivate.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main- • If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than two This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert seconds, the system will hold brake pressure for up in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display to 10 minutes. If no driver action is taken after the with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its 10 minutes, the Electric Park Brake will be applied the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
maximum braking capacity. and the ACC system will cancel. when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path, this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: • While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill (or
the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/h), and NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
opened, the Electric Park Brake will be applied and warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
the ACC system will cancel. available.
system is applying the brakes autonomously.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 125 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 126 STARTING AND OPERATING

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should “CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING SERVICE ACC WARNING
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
warning will display, and a chime will sound when con- play reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
ditions temporarily limit system performance. This most “Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
tant to note the following maintenance items: or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such able under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
damage the sensor lens. of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so will read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- an authorized dealer.
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure shield” and the system will have degraded
and require a sensor realignment. performance. Precautions While Driving With ACC
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged This message can sometimes be displayed while driving In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for in adverse weather conditions. The ACC system will issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
service. recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any intervene. The following are examples of these types of
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the vehicles or objects in its path this warning may tempo- situations:
sensor, including transparent material or aftermar-
rarily occur.
ket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system fail- TOWING A TRAILER
ure or malfunction. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
OFFSET DRIVING
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
When the condition that created limited functionality is ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
simply reactivating it.
no longer present, the system will return to full offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
NOTE: functionality. ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
• If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” NOTE: move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
authorized dealer. obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
• Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after- camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC operation.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 126 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 127

USING ACC ON HILLS

ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.

Offset Driving Condition Example Lane Changing Example 4

TURNS AND BENDS NARROW VEHICLES
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil- the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is ACC Hill Example they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
out of the curve, the system will resume your original sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system LANE CHANGING
functionality.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
NOTE: lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it
is too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicle Example

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 127 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 128 STARTING AND OPERATING

STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES NOTE: Visual + Chime

When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will alert
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For • The TSA system will automatically display the the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
example, ACC will not react in situations where the detected road sign using the unit of measurement
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle (mph or km/h) selected within the instrument clus- exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a graphic
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this ter display. in the instrument cluster display, and by sounding an
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ- audible alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds,
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and • If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will and the visual alert will remain on as long as the
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the vehicle is exceeding the speed limit.
Navigation system. TSA Off
• The system always checks the traffic signs indicat- When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
ing the current speed limit. The system is able to show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
recognize and display up to two different road signs screen, which will show detected speed limit signs), and
in the instrument cluster display. These road signs no alerts will be issued to the driver.
can be found on the Driver Assist page.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument clus-
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the ter display, and can display any combination of signs at
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and supplemen-
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on tal info, and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending on what
the instrument cluster display. information is available.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example When a newly detected speed limit is higher than the
NOTE:
current speed limit, the display will update along with
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will be
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — displayed when the driver selects it on the HOME
an up arrow.
screen. When a newly detected speed limit is lower than the
IF EQUIPPED current speed limit, the display will update along with a
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES down arrow.
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data when TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are NOTE:
the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect recog- available through the Uconnect system page 168. Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
nizable road signs such as: Visual seconds.
• Speed limits When Visual is selected, the system will alert the driver
• School zones when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
• No passing zones detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the instru-
ment cluster display.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 128 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 129

Speed Limit Exceeded

When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed speed
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the
instrument cluster display will show a red outline to
IF EQUIPPED
alert the driver.
OPERATION
CAUTION! The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers
• Traffic Sign Assist is designed to assist the driver the vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds
and not to substitute the driver. It is the driver’s up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
responsibility to continue to monitor the vehicle
For ACC system operating instructions and system limi-
speed.
tations, see page 121.
Traffic Signs Recognized • Functionality may be limited or the system may not 4
work if the sensor is obstructed. NOTE:
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental Informa- • The system may have limited operation or not work
tion (School Zone) at all in weather conditions such as heavy rain, • The driver should always obey traffic laws and
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected speed limits. Never drive above applicable speed
hail, and thick fog. Strong light contrasts can influ-
3 — No Passing Zone Detected limit restrictions.
ence the recognition capability of the sensor.

Supplemental Information • The area surrounding the sensor must not be cov- • The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
ered with stickers or any other object. accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Supplemental information may be displayed, along with Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long as
a newly detected speed limit, indicating special circum- • Do not tamper or perform any operations in the
the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
area of the windshield glass directly surrounding
stances of which the driver should be aware. Available in front is maintained. ADA will also keep your vehicle
the sensor.
supplemental information includes: centered between the lane lines, and monitor for other
• School • Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
vehicles in adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. For glass
Monitoring sensors.
• Construction cleaning recommendations, see page 319.
Two types of Active Driving Assist systems are available:
• Rain
• Snow • Base ADA system
• Fog • Hands-Free ADA system
Base Active Driving Assist System — If Equipped
NOTE: The Base ADA system uses sensors within the steering
Supplemental information will not be displayed when wheel to measure driver attentiveness, and requires
the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS. that the driver have their hands on the steering wheel
at all times.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 129 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 130 STARTING AND OPERATING

The system will generally aim to keep the vehicle cen- NOTE:
tered in the lane, but when the driver turns the steering
wheel (e.g. to move farther away from a large vehicle in • The Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is only
an adjacent lane) the system will reduce its control and available on approved compatible roadways. Please
enter "co-steering" mode. While in co-steering mode, consult the Jeep® website for further details on
the system will provide reduced assistance and allow compatible roadways.
the driver to control the path of the vehicle. Once the • The Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system
driver stops providing input to the steering wheel, the requires an active subscription through the Jeep®
system will require a few seconds to fully resume lane Connect (Uconnect Connected Services) package. If
centering assistance, especially during curves. the ADA on/off button is pushed without an active
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist System — If Equipped subscription, the instrument cluster display will
The Hands-Free ADA system uses sensors within the show the message “Active Driving Assist Unavailable
steering wheel and a driver monitoring camera located Assisted Lane Change (Green Left Arrow) Update Subscription”. Refer to the Uconnect Own-
on top of the steering column to monitor driver atten- er’s Manual Supplement for further information.
tiveness. The Hands-Free ADA system allows the driver • If previously disabled, activating the Hands-Free
to remove their hands from the steering wheel when WARNING!
Active Driving Assist system will also activate the
engaged, but requires that the driver continue to pay The driver is always responsible for determining if a Forward Collision Warning and Pedestrian Emer-
attention to the road. lane change is safe. Failure to follow this warning can gency Braking systems page 215.
The Hands-Free ADA system will also change lanes result in a collision and death or serious personal
when a turn signal is activated if the adjacent lane in injury. • If the vehicle is equipped with the Jeep® Connect
(Uconnect Connected Services) package, additional
the direction indicated is clear of another vehicle, and data may be collected through the Jeep® Connect
lane markings are detected (noted by a dashed line in Extended Auto Resume (Uconnect Connected Services) system. This
the direction of the available lane change). The system includes information about the vehicle’s operation,
If equipped with Hands-Free ADA and the system brings
uses sensors, including Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) a collision involving the vehicle, the use of the
your vehicle to a stop while following the vehicle ahead,
sensors, to determine if a lane change is possible. If the vehicle and its features, and in certain situations,
your vehicle will automatically resume driving without
assisted lane change is in progress, a green arrow will the location and approximate GPS speed of the
driver input when the path in front of the vehicle is clear
appear. If a lane change is requested but the direction vehicle. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
and the driver is attentive. The path in front of the
indicated is not possible, a yellow arrow will appear. Supplement for Terms and Conditions and Privacy
vehicle is determined to be clear based on the forward
Once conditions are clear, the arrow will turn green and Statements.
facing camera, front radars, and front ultrasonic
the assisted lane change will begin.
sensors.
Additionally, Hands-Free ADA will slow the
If the vehicle in front does not start moving after
• The driver monitoring camera may record images of
vehicle down and issue a warning light within the driver during certain crash, or near crash-like
10 minutes, the Electric Park Brake (EPB) will be situations. To retrieve the images recorded by the
the instrument cluster display when
applied and the system will cancel. camera, special equipment is required and access
approaching and going through sharp
curves. to the vehicle or the camera is needed.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 130 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 131

• Vehicle data may be read from the Hands-Free ADA TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST 4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by push-
system with special equipment and access to the ing the Distance Increase or Distance Decrease
vehicle or the Event Data Recorder (EDR). ON OR OFF buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
WARNING! “System Engagement Conditions” in the next section,
the system will engage and the steering wheel image in
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a conve- the display will change to green.
nience system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
be attentive of road traffic, weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, position in the
lane compared to other vehicles, and brake operation
to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
4
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
Some states and local laws may require hands to be
kept on the steering wheel at all times. For vehicles To enable the Active Driving Assist system, proceed as
equipped with the Hands-Free ADA system, ONLY follows:
remove your hands from the steering wheel if the Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
Hands-Free system is engaged, it is safe to do so, and 1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button located
on the right side of the steering wheel. The steering NOTE:
it is permitted by state and local laws.
wheel image will display white in the instrument
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist systems:
cluster display until the system is engaged. If ACC • Along with the color change of the steering wheel
• When driving in complex driving situations (e.g. was previously disabled, pushing this button will
image, the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster
urban environments, construction zones, etc.), display will also change to green when ADA is
activate BOTH ACC and Active Driving Assist engaged.
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g.
systems.
rain, snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road condi- System Engagement Conditions
tions (e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane mark- 2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the ADA on/off
The following conditions must be met before the system
ings, etc.). button, ACC will remain active and ADA will also
will engage:
become engaged (once all other conditions are
• When entering a highway on-ramp or exiting an met). • Active Driving Assist system is enabled
off-ramp.
• When driving on roads that are icy, snow covered, 3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA on/off • Driver seat belt is buckled
or slippery. button, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button • Driver is not pressing the brake pedal
• When driving during difficult or uncertain conditions. and release when the desired driving speed is • Driver door is closed
shown in the instrument cluster display.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 131 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 132 STARTING AND OPERATING

• System detects visible lane markings System Deactivation • When the system is deactivated, the system status
• Vehicle is at an allowable ride height The system will be deactivated in any of the following indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane Manage-
situations: ment will return to its previous state, and ACC will
• Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h) disable or remain engaged pending system
• Vehicle is centered in lane • If the system has detected driver inattentiveness, conditions.
and has gone through all escalation warnings:
• Turn signal is not activated ○ Base ADA: Hands no longer detected on the Hands-Free System Deactivation (If Equipped)
• Vehicle is not in a tight curve steering wheel In addition to the deactivation conditions previously
• Trailer is not connected ○ Hands-Free ADA: Driver no longer attentive listed, the Hands-Free ADA system will also deactivate
• Driver has hands on steering wheel and is paying in the following situations:
• If lane markings are no longer detected or poor road
attention to the road conditions are experienced • The system initiates a Stop-In-Lane maneuver to
• If equipped with the Hands-Free system, vehicle is stop the vehicle due to driver inattentiveness. The
• If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is Stop-In-Lane maneuver can be overridden by placing
driving on an approved roadway deactivated
hands on the steering wheel and applying the accel-
• If equipped with the Hands-Free system, a subscrip- • If a turn signal is used when equipped with Base erator or brake pedal. Refer to “Indications On The
tion is active and the vehicle is receiving a clear cel- ADA (unless a target is in the blind spot zone on the Display” in the next section for further information.
lular signal same side the turn signal is being applied)
• If the driver performs an evasive maneuver, applying • The vehicle is not receiving a clear cellular signal for
NOTE: an extended period of time.
high torque to the steering wheel for a short duration
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the steer-
• If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled • The subscription for the Hands-Free system is
ing wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the outside. expired.
Gripping the inside areas of the steering wheel will not • If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h) • The vehicle leaves a supported roadway.
satisfy the hands-on condition to engage the system. • If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is pushed
again (ADA will turn off) INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
• If the driver steers out of the lane and crosses a The Active Driving Assist system status can always be
lane marking viewed in the instrument cluster display, and status
• If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system changes are shown by changes in color of the system’s
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking indicator lights.
NOTE: As the system detects driver inattentiveness as previ-
ously described page 129, the system status indi-
• ADA will not enable if the system detects a trailer is cator lights will change from green, to yellow, to red.
connected to the vehicle. The following indicators will change in color as warnings
• Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button or to the driver escalate:
deactivating ACC will turn the system off. All other
deactivation conditions will place the system back • Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel the instrument cluster display or Head Up Display
into the “enabled” state with the steering wheel indi- [if equipped])
cator displayed in white until all engagement condi-
tions are met again. • Glow effect of the instrument cluster display

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 132 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 133

For Base ADA, if driver’s hands are not returned to the NOTE: The driver can take control of the vehicle at anytime to
steering wheel, the system will deactivate. For both Base ADA and Hands-Free ADA, the driver override the warnings by pressing the gas or brake
For Hands-Free ADA, if driver attention is not returned, MUST replace hands on the steering wheel and take pedal, moving the steering wheel, and being attentive
the system will perform a Stop-In-Lane maneuver. Once control of the vehicle when the system is deactivated. to the road.
the vehicle is at a standstill, the vehicle will be shifted
to PARK and the Electric Park Brake (EPB) will be SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
applied. Then, the vehicle will attempt to place an emer-
gency call through the Assist and SOS system. If too
WARNING!
many Stop-In-Lane maneuvers are initiated, or if one is
completed, the system will be unavailable until the igni- Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist
tion is cycled OFF, then back to ON. feature, requiring driver attention at all times. To pre-
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off vent serious injury or death:
• ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver. • Always remember that the Active Driving Assist 4
system is a convenience system that cannot accu-
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White rately detect all situations. Complete attention is
• ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the sys- always required while driving, even when using the
tem is not actively steering and providing speed con- Active Driving Assist system.
trol for the vehicle. Active Driving Assist Canceled Message
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
• Always remain alert and be ready to take control of
the vehicle in the event that the Active Driving
SYSTEM STATUS
• System is actively steering and providing speed con- Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
Assist system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full
trol for the vehicle and the system detects driver is functionality as described further before and after
attentive. (green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue sev- this statement.
eral accompanying warnings intended to provide the
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate a
• Always keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the steering wheel when the Base Active Driving
• Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning potential collision. Assist system is activated.
the driver to place hands on the steering wheel, or
Base Active Driving Assist System
look back toward the road (if equipped with the • Always keep your eyes on the road when the Hands-
Hands-Free system). • Two haptic brake jerk warnings will be issued (red Free Active Driving Assist system is activated.
warning light is issued).
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red • Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and
• Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or • A steering wheel vibration warning (if enabled) will pay attention to traffic conditions.
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
driver take-over is being requested, warning the
example, when driving on a tight curve. The steering
• Do not use a hand held device when either Base, or
driver to place hands on the steering wheel, or Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is engaged.
wheel vibration feature can be turned on or off
if equipped with the Hands-Free system, take con-
trol of the vehicle.
within the Uconnect system page 168. • Always pay attention to the road when the Hands-
Free Active Driving Assist system is engaged. The
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist System Active Driving Assist system will not steer to avoid
• A seat vibration warning will occur (red warning light safety hazards, construction zones, objects, or
is issued). (Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 133 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 134 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the sus- faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
road impediments. You need to take control to pension, installing different sized wheels or tires) or Assist system or the Braking System Module.
steer and brake the vehicle in such situations, and if there has been damage due to road hazards
• The automatic braking function may only be applied
when merging into traffic, exiting the highway, • Driving near highway toll booths if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid
making a turn for crossing traffic, or stopping for colliding with a detected obstacle.
traffic control devices. NOTE:
• Do not place any objects on the steering wheel If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind- • The automatic braking function may not be applied
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could interfere shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear
with the hand detection sensors. possible. of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.

The Base Active Driving Assist and Hands-Free Active

• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
Driving Assist systems DO NOT: PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST disabled from the Customer Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect system.
• Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
• Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles, slower state for the automatic braking function through
vehicles, construction zones or equipment, pedestri- The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and ignition cycles.
ans, or animals audible indications of the distance between the rear,
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
• Respond to traffic lights or stop signs and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
• Merge onto highways or exit off ramps (e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
• Change lanes (exception: Hands-Free, only when may be automatically applied and released when per- NOTE:
initiated by the driver) forming a reverse parking maneuver if the system
• React to cross traffic detects a possible collision with an obstacle. • The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
NOTE: NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of • The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
ADA. For ACC system limitations page 121. • The driver can disable the automatic braking func- acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
tion by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense vehicle's movements.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited or switch. The driver can also override automatic brak-
reduced functionality when one of the following condi- For limitations of this system and recommendations,
ing by changing the gear or by pressing the gas see page 140.
tions occur: pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
• The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing event.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.) • Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is is changed to the ON/RUN position.
in 4WD Low.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 134 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 135

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE DISPLAY
in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia/ The warning display will turn on indicating the system
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi- bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display view. The front sensors detect obstacles from approxi- a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display if mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can the vehicle.
7 mph (11 km/h). detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
These distances depend on the location, type and ori-
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
entation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the dis- 4
NOTE: play will show the single arc moving closer to the
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active Park vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 sec-
Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors located in ond tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
the rear fascia/bumper.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 135 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 136 STARTING AND OPERATING

Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 136 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 137

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Rear Distance Greater than 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
(inches/cm) 79 inches (200 cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Single 1/2
None Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
6th 5th
Arcs-Left None None None None None
Flashing Flashing
7th 6th 5th
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid
Flashing Flashing Flashing 4
6th 5th
Arcs-Right None None None None None
Flashing Flashing
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced

WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert
None None None Fast Continuous
Chime
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes

NOTE: Front Park Assist Audible Alerts Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible Front and rear chime volume settings can be selected
when the system is sounding an audio tone. alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when from the Uconnect system page 168.
an obstacle has been detected, and the vehicle is The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
stationary.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 137 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 138 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the ASSIST SYSTEM cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear
instrument cluster display page 86. It provides see an authorized dealer.
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense System
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
the detected obstacle.
it will display a pop-up. The pop-up will include up to two an authorized dealer.
faults. Possible fault messages are "PARKSENSE
ENABLING AND DISABLING UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED.” The pop-up mes-
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
sage will display for five seconds. Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
with the ParkSense switch located on the
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
switch panel above the Uconnect display.
system has detected a faulted condition, the instru- not scratch or poke the sensors.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
ment cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
enable the system, the instrument cluster will display
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
the system state.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE PRECAUTIONS
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for
system, the instrument cluster will display the five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will NOTE:
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two sec- be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or
onds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and rear sensor location depending on where the fault is • Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts ParkSense system operating properly.
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
NOTE: could affect the performance of ParkSense.
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SER-
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will
VICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus-
within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
be displayed. graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is in REVERSE. turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires appears in the instrument cluster display make sure cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentar- the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ily, and then the LED will be on.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 138 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 139

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care WARNING!

The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must and, when enabled, with visual indications on the
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or because the hitch ball will be much closer to the instrument cluster display.
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance
working properly. The ParkSense system might not vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen- Warning volume/chime will match the Front ParkSense
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/ sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball volume and chime type.
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. a false indication that an obstacle is behind the Warning volume/chime will match the Rear ParkSense
vehicle.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense volume and chime type.
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of
WARNING ALERTS
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result CAUTION!
in the system misinterpreting a close object as a Less than 4
Distance 12 – 24 inches
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to (inches/cm)
12 inches
(30–60 cm)
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed recognize every obstacle, including small (30 cm)
in the instrument cluster. obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in above or below the sensors will not be detected Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide when they are in close proximity. Fast audible
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the chime as the
vehicle. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Audible Alert
Continuous objects get
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when Chime
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that close to the
WARNING! the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using vehicle
ParkSense. Radio Volume
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
Reduced
Yes Yes
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure NOTE:
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system detects the pres- ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
ence of side obstacles near the vehicle using the park- when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
You are responsible for safety and must continue
ing sensors located in the front and rear audible tone will only sound if a collision is possible.
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death. fascia/bumpers.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
Side Distance Warning Display
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles page 168.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 139 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 140 STARTING AND OPERATING

Activation/Deactivation • When you turn ParkSense off, the message to WARNING!

appear in the instrument cluster display will read
The system can operate only after driving a short dis-
“PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
tance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7 mph
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
(0 and 11 km/h). The system can be activated/
again, even if you cycle the ignition key. because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
deactivated via the Settings menu of the Uconnect sys-
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the
tem. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-
ParkSense hard switch, then the Side Distance Warning radio when it is sounding a tone.
system will automatically be deactivated. sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
feature: not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or vehicle.
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning system working properly. The ParkSense system might not
sensors. Free the bumpers of any obstacles, ensure detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/ CAUTION!
that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow, bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
operating properly. recognize every obstacle, including small
“System Not Available” — This message is displayed if
• The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
interfere with the correct operation of the parking detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
the Side Distance Warning system is not available. The sensors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is above or below the sensors will not be detected
failed operation of the system might be due to the recommended to remove the removable tow hook when they are in close proximity.
insufficient voltage from the battery or other failures on ball assembly and any attachments from the vehicle
the electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer as when it is not used for towing operations. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
soon as possible to have the electrical system checked. ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
ParkSense Usage Precautions WARNING! the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
Some conditions may influence the performance of the • Drivers must be careful when backing up even
Side Distance Warning system: when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
NOTE: to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
• Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
You are responsible for safety and must continue — IF EQUIPPED
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly. to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom- assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
vibrations could affect the performance of mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem- ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
ParkSense. bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 140 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 141

system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver ENABLING AND DISABLING THE The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and ate and search for a parking space when the following
brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST conditions are present:
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is SYSTEM • Gear selector is in DRIVE
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can • Ignition is in the RUN position
side or passenger side). be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense • ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
Active Park Assist switch, located on the • Driver's door is closed
NOTE: switch panel above the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
• Rear liftgate is closed
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch • Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects,
and must intervene as required.
once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time • The outer surface and the underside of the front
will disable the system (LED turns off). and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of
• The system is designed to assist the driver and not The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions 4
to substitute the driver. automatically for any of the following conditions: NOTE:
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver • Parking maneuver is completed If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
• Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct
when searching for a parking space the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will can-
manually complete the parking maneuver. • Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) dur- cel. The driver must then reactivate the system by push-
ing active steering guidance into the parking space
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi- ing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc.,
• Steering wheel is touched during active steering When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
guidance into the parking space
or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). • ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is will turn off if any of the preceding conditions are not
pushed
present.
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least • Driver's door is opened If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and an
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali- • Rear liftgate is opened objected is detected, the system will default to Parallel
brated and performs accurately. This is due to the • Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking Sys- Park Exit. A prompt will appear in the radio screen, and
system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the tem intervention the driver will need to select “Yes” or “No” for a Parallel
performance of the feature. The system will also The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a maxi- Park Exit maneuver. Any other conditions will result in a
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibra- mum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If default to a Parallel Parking maneuver.
tion to account for differences such as over or under the maneuver cannot be completed within the maxi-
inflated tires and new tires. mum amount of shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to com-
plete the maneuver manually.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 141 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 142 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR • The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected

parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
OPERATION protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, you can select between Parallel, Perpendicu- • When searching for a parking space, the driver
lar, and Parallel Park Exit maneuvers in the Uconnect should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
system. on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected park-
ing space (e.g., if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
detected parking space for the maneuver).
• While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the driver
shifts to REVERSE while searching for a parking from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a
space, a camera image will appear in the Uconnect standstill (your hands still removed from the steering
display with a “Shift To Drive” message. wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector
When an available parking space has been found, and into the REVERSE position.
the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to
Choose Parking Maneuver move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
NOTE: maneuver being performed).
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn Once active steering begins, a camera image will dis-
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle play in the Uconnect display with prompts that will dis-
you want to perform the parking maneuver. The play for the duration of the maneuver.
ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automati-
cally search for a parking space on the passenger's
side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
Shift To Reverse — Parallel Parking Space
etc.).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 142 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 143

• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and WARNING!

accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver. backing up and moving forward. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up serious injury or death.
slowly. • Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem, it is strongly recommended that the ball
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or dam-
within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the
age to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
Shift To Reverse — Perpendicular Parking Space
complete the maneuver manually.
will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear 4
fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the con-
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steer- ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
the vehicle’s surroundings, and move backward. ing guidance into the parking space. The system will its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE) while provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) obstacle is behind the vehicle.
keeping hands off of the steering wheel will be that tells them to slow down. The driver is then
instructed to the driver while checking the vehicle’s responsible for completing the maneuver if the sys-
surroundings before completing the parking maneuver. tem is canceled.
CAUTION!
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneu-
ver is complete and the driver will be instructed to
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for • The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
any reason, the driver must take control of the
check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle. parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
vehicle into PARK. The message “Active ParkSense obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
Complete - Check Parking Position” will be displayed might be temporarily detected or not detected at
momentarily. WARNING! all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
NOTE: • Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
proximity.
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
• It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
Always check carefully behind and in front of your ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their sur-
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
required.
Park Assist system.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 143 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 144 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXITING THE PARKING SPACE ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —

NOTE: IF EQUIPPED
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
Activation ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
To activate this function, push the Active ParkSense OPERATION
switch once. After selection, the system activates and The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a for-
warns the driver on the instrument cluster display about ward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
the operations that have to be carried out to perform edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
the maneuver correctly. boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring
Selection Of The Maneuver Side Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward (BSM) sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction that while the driver is preparing to change lanes.
you want to perform the maneuver. Use the right arrow The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
indicator to perform the maneuver to the right side and (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
use the left arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
the left. approaches (or crosses) the lane marking with no turn
During the maneuver, the system instructs the driver to signal applied, and the blind spot zone is not occupied,
shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the the ALM system provides warnings to prompt the driver
direction you want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel to remain within the lane boundaries. These warnings
and use the brake or accelerator pedals as instructed, include a visual warning in the instrument cluster along
while the system handles the steering automatically for with steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
exiting the parking space. If the driver continues to Settings).
carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on the steer- If the driver crosses the lane marking, the system will
ing wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or holding either guide the vehicle back to the center of the lane,
the steering wheel to prevent its movement), the Shift To Drive Then Move Forward provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both,
maneuver will be interrupted. depending on radio settings.
End Of Maneuver When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change, and a
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the vehicle is detected in the BSM zone on that side of the
end of the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle vehicle, the ALM system provides a warning in the form
control to the driver. of steering assist and/or steering vibration (depending
on radio settings) to guide the vehicle back to the cen-
ter of the lane.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 144 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 145

NOTE: TURNING ACTIVE LANE

• The system will suppress visual warnings, steering MANAGEMENT ON OR OFF
vibration (if selected in radio settings), and steering
The Active Lane Management button is
assistance (if selected in radio settings) when the
located on the switch panel above the
driver activates the turn signal, the blind spot zone
Uconnect display.
is clear of vehicles, and a lane change is occurring.
• If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a To turn the system on, push the Active Lane Manage-
vehicle in the adjacent lane, and the turn signal is ment button (LED turns off). A message is shown in the
applied in that direction, the BSM LED on the mirror instrument cluster display.
will flash. If the driver continues to attempt the lane
change, steering wheel torque will be provided to To turn the system off, push the button again (LED
keep the vehicle within its lane markings. turns on).
System On (Gray Lines) 4
The driver may manually override the steering assist NOTE:
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any The Active Lane Management system will retain the last Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
time. system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when • When the system is on and only the left lane mark-
When only a single lane marking is detected and the the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. ing has been detected, and the system is ready to
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
applied), the Active Lane Management system provides ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT display and a vibration and/or steering assist
a visual warning in the instrument cluster, as well as a warning in the steering wheel if a lane departure
steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect Set-
WARNING MESSAGE occurs, the left lane line will be green.
tings), to prompt the driver to remain within the lane The Active Lane Management system will indicate the • When the system senses the lane line has been
boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out of the current lane drift condition through the instrument clus- approached (but not crossed), the left lane line will
lane, the system provides a flashing visual warning ter display. change to solid yellow and the system will provide a
through the instrument cluster display as well as a hap- When the system is on, the lane lines are gray when haptic steering wheel vibration and/or steering
tic steering wheel vibration (if configured in Uconnect both of the lane boundaries have not been detected. assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
• When the system senses the lane line is being
NOTE: crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow.
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 145 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 146 STARTING AND OPERATING

• When the system senses the lane line is being

crossed, the left lane line changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is
applied to the steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,
the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line) Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)

NOTE: • When the system senses a lane drift situation, the

The Active Lane Management system operates with left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time, steering
similar behavior for a right lane departure when only assist warning is applied to the steering wheel in the
the right lane marking has been detected. opposite direction of the lane boundary.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected For example: If approaching the left side of the lane, Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the system is on, the lane lines turn from gray NOTE:
to green to indicate that both of the lane markings
have been detected. When both lane markings have
been detected, the system is ready to provide visual • The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
vibration and/or steering assist warning in the steer- • If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle begins
ing wheel if a lane departure occurs. to depart the lane at the same time the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system detects another vehicle in
the BSM zones, the system will provide a haptic
steering wheel vibration and/or steering assist
torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).

Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 146 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 147

CHANGING ACTIVE LANE top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disap- The following table shows the approximate distances
pear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the for each zone:
MANAGEMENT STATUS vehicle above the rear license plate.
Distance To The Rear Of
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Management When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam- Zone
system are available within the Uconnect system The Vehicle
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
page 168. and the previous screen appears. Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Selectable Warning Types: Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
6.5 ft or greater
• Vibration Only 1. Press the Vehicle button located on the bottom of Green
(2 m or greater)
• Steering Assist Only the Uconnect display and then select the Controls
• Vibration And Steering Assist menu.
WARNING!
Other configurable settings for this system are for the 2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the Rear
intensity of the vibration (high/med/low), steering View Camera system on. Drivers must be careful when backing up even when 4
assist warning (hi/med/low), and the warning zone sen- using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
sitivity (early/medium/late). NOTE: check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
NOTE: obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
modes of operation that may be selected through the
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
• The system will not apply vibration and/or steering Uconnect system page 168.
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety sys- When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
tem engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Colli- and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is
sion Warning, etc.). shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on,
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up CAUTION!
• The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on to 10 seconds unless the following conditions occur:
when the ALM system is enabled.
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
• The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged. placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button
to disable the display of the Rear View Camera is • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro- her shoulder when using ParkView.
Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image jected backup path based on the steering wheel posi-
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the tion. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
NOTE:
gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
displayed on the Uconnect display screen along with a hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the dis- If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the tance to the rear of the vehicle. the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 147 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 148 STARTING AND OPERATING

Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped) VIEWING AT SPEED The TrailCam system has programmable settings that
When the rear window washer is activated by pushing may be selected through the Uconnect system
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or page 168.
the windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the Rear
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be acti-
Back Up camera and Digital Rearview Mirror Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
vated with the Back Up Camera button in the
(if equipped) cameras are also washed. For more infor- TrailCam view can be activated via the following methods:
Controls menu. This feature allows the cus-
mation, see page 57.
tomer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or • Press the FWD Camera button on the controls screen.
trailer, if equipped) for up to 10 seconds while driving. If • Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the
ZOOM VIEW the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the apps menu.
When the Rear View Camera image is being Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below until deactivated via the X button on the touchscreen. • Press the TrailCam button on the Off-Road Pages.
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the
position, Zoom View is available. By pressing icon on the Back Up Camera view. The Back Up
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the dis- TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Camera view can also be activated by pressing the
play screen, the image will zoom in to four times the stan- icon on the TrailCam view.
The TrailCam system allows you to see an on-screen
dard view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
image of the front view of your vehicle. The image will
view to the standard Back Up Camera display. era delay turned off and TrailCam view is active, the
be displayed on the Uconnect display along with a
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in TrailCam mode is exited and the previous screen
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view appears again.
top of the screen.
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, era delay turned on and the TrailCam view is active, the
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume. TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h). in the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to dis-
able display of the TrailCam view is pressed.
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and NOTE:
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).

NOTE:
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the TrailCam
image will be displayed continuously until deacti-
• If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, vated via the touchscreen X button, the transmis-
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph Front View Camera
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
NOTE: the OFF position.
will appear gray.
• While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be The system will stay active while in 4WD Low. • The touchscreen X button to disable the display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when the
visible.
vehicle is not in REVERSE.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 148 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 149

• The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera button located on the
IF EQUIPPED
TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night Vision Cam-
stop when the button is released. The camera can be era system which uses an infrared camera to view the
washed up to 20 seconds at a time while holding the area ahead of the vehicle, beyond the headlights, to
button. detect people and large animals when it is dark
outside.
NOTE: The system detects pedestrians or large animals by
• Pressing the Clean Camera button will also wash the measuring the temperature difference between the
Night Vision camera (if equipped). object and the surrounding area.
FamCam Display Example (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown) The thermal objects detected by the camera can be 4
• If the front window washer feature is activated, all of displayed in the instrument cluster display. Scroll to the
the front cameras on the vehicle will be washed as To change the seat shown in the zoomed in view, press
a different seat location on the left side of the display. Night Vision page in the instrument cluster display
well. The front camera washers will not operate
The zoomed in view will then show the new seat loca- menu page 90 to display the Night Vision screen.
when the low washer fluid warning is displayed.
tion. By default, the second row driver’s side seat will Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter on the
When enabled, active dynamic tire lines are projected
be displayed in the zoomed in view. display while cold objects (e.g. traffic signs) will appear
on the ground plane of the TrailCam view based on the
The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions and darker.
steering wheel position.
will appear black and white in low light conditions. NOTE:
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the X on the
screen, the view will close. Otherwise, the FamCam • Night Vision only shows objects of interest that are
view will remain on the display. warmer or colder than the surroundings.
The FamCam system consists of an interior monitoring
camera mounted on the headliner that allows the driver
NOTE: • Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control bright-
to view cargo/passengers in the rear interior of the ness to make the image appear brighter or dimmer.
vehicle through the Uconnect screen. When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in the
zoomed in view on the right side of the display will be To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a different
To activate the feature, press the FamCam retained. The next time the feature is activated, the menu in the instrument cluster display.
button in the Controls tab of the Vehicle same seat will be shown in the zoomed in view. A yellow or red border and box highlight will appear
menu. The FamCam feature can also be around objects of interest. More than one object of
accessed from the App Drawer, or the status interest may be highlighted.
bar at the top of the Uconnect display.
The display will show the entire view inside the vehicle
on the left side of the screen, and will show a zoomed
in view of the selected seat on the right side of the
screen.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 149 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 150 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target is in or warning messages will all be off. Pedestrians and ani-
approaching the vehicle path mals can still be detected by the system, but there will
Level 2 Warnings: be no warnings.
• Red telltale in the instrument cluster display The Night Vision alert status telltale will be
gray when the warnings are suppressed. The
• Red highlights around the detected telltale will also turn gray to indicate that the
pedestrian/animal
alerts are suppressed due to environmental
• Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds factors (e.g. daylight hours, external temperature is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision with greater than 86°F (30°C)) or if the gear selector is in
the detected pedestrian/animal is possible REVERSE. When the Night Vision alerts are active, the
Highlight Around Objects Of Interest
• The pedestrian/animal is directly in the vehicle telltale will be green page 93.
path, close to the headlight area Camera Washers
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will update in • A video pop-up will display when there is a target
real time based upon the current Night Vision assessment. When the front window washer is activated, the Night
detected and the instrument cluster display is not Vision camera will also be washed page 56.
The two categories of Night Vision warnings are Pedes- showing the Night Vision page
trian Warnings and Animal Warnings. • A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning detection
event WARNING!
Pedestrian Warning Light
Only one telltale can be displayed at a time based upon • Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a
priority. warning.
The priority order of the warnings from highest to lowest • Never attempt to swerve around animals if doing
is: so would endanger you or others.
Animal Warning Light
1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2 • Do not stare at the image while driving. You could
crash and you or others could be injured.
2. Animal Warning Level 2
• The Night Vision system only provides alerts to
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1 objects of interest and cannot serve as a substi-
tute for the driver’s personal judgment. The warn-
4. Animal Warning Level 1
A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is considered either ings are meant to direct your attention to the
Level 1 or Level 2. Level 1 warnings are yellow, and Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head Up Display detected objects, but the Night Vision system does
Level 2 warnings are red. The colors are not (if equipped). not automatically brake the vehicle and may not
configurable. provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a
NOTE:
Level 1 Warnings: crash.
If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all Level
• Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster display 2 warnings become Level 1 warnings. • Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian or large
animal is detected by the system.
• Yellow highlights around the detected You can enable or disable the warnings within the
(Continued)
pedestrian/animal Uconnect system page 168.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 150 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 151

If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or “Night

WARNING! WARNING! Vision Unavailable Service Required" appears in the
instrument cluster display after cycling the ignition, see
• It is always the driver’s responsibility to be atten- • Night Vision may not detect pedestrians or animals an authorized dealer.
tive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, and highlight them if:
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, and ○ They are not in an upright position, for example if The camera must be properly aligned to work correctly.
most importantly, brake operation, to ensure safe they are sitting or lying down, or if the pedes- If the camera needs adjustment, see an authorized
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. trian is riding a bicycle dealer. Do not attempt to adjust the camera yourself.
Your complete attention is always required while ○ The figure in the display appears incomplete, for NOTE:
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. example because the pedestrian or animal is Alignment and performance of the Night Vision may be
partially behind a vehicle affected by aftermarket modifications. Mopar® parts
○ The pedestrian/animal is not directly ahead in should be used to get the optimal performance of this
DETECTION RANGE the coverage area system.
The system can detect people 4 ft (1.25 m) tall or ○ The pedestrian/animal is part of a group 4
greater in the upright position. The system can also ○ The pedestrian is wearing certain types of NIGHT VISION SYSTEM
detect animals that are four-legged and 3 ft (1 m) tall or clothing
greater in the upright position. ○ The pedestrian/animal is moving too quickly LIMITATIONS
through the field of view The Night Vision display is deactivated under the follow-
The detection distance for the system is between 26 ft ○ The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain, snow, or ice
(8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from the front of the vehicle. ing conditions:
The system may not be able to detect pedestrians or • Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
animals in the following situations: SERVICE THE NIGHT VISION • The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
• Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection range SYSTEM • The headlights are off and the vehicle speed is
• Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered greater than 8 mph (13 km/h)
When service conditions are present, the following fault The Night Vision display warnings are suppressed under
• Pedestrian/animal does not reach the minimum messages may appear in the instrument cluster display the following conditions:
detection height when the vehicle is placed in the ON position.
NOTE: If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked" appears in
• Daylight hours
Other objects on the road that meet the height/shape/ the instrument cluster display, make sure the camera is • Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of pedestrians/ clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other debris. The camera The system may not be fully functional in the following
animals may be detected and classified as targets. is located in the upper fascia/bumper, inside the driver situations:
side grille slot. Clean the camera using a soft wet cloth • On steep hills
or by pressing the Clean Camera button in the
WARNING! Uconnect system. If the message continues to appear
• On tight curves of the road
after cycling the ignition, see an authorized dealer. • If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked by dirt,
• Night Vision can only detect pedestrians and ani- snow, ice, or other debris
mals located within the range of the infrared
camera. • In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog, rain,
snow, or other weather conditions
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 151 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 152 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the vehicle has been modified with aftermarket speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
parts and/or accessories into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: There is a touchscreen X button to disable the display
of the camera image.
If any of these conditions are present, the system does
not need service. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the Surround View Camera mode
is exited and the last known screen appears again.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED the side view mirrors and its projected backup path
based on the steering wheel position.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle. Surround View Camera View
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a The following table shows the approximate distances NOTE:
different view is selected through the touchscreen but- for each zone:
tons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which doors • Front tires will be in image when the tires are
are open. The image will be displayed on the Uconnect Distance To The Rear Of turned.
display along with a caution note “Check Entire Sur- Zone
The Vehicle • Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec- may appear distorted.
onds, this note will disappear. The Surround View Cam- Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
era system is comprised of four sequential cameras Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) • Top View will show which doors are open.
located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors.
Green
6.5 ft or greater • Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel outside
(2 m or greater) image in Top View, but the standard view remains
NOTE:
unchanged.
The Surround View Camera system has programmable Modes Of Operation
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect Rear View Plus Top View
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
system page 168. selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button This is the default view of the system in
Press this button on the touchscreen to located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect REVERSE and is always paired with the Top
enter the Surround View Camera menu in system. View of the vehicle with optional active guide-
the Uconnect system. lines for the projected path when enabled.
Top View
Rear Cross Path View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will give
View or Top View is the default view of the system. are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front, the driver a wider angle view of the rear cam-
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam- rear, and if equipped, the sides of the vehicle. The arcs era system. The Top View will be disabled
era delay turned on, the camera image will continue to will change color from yellow to red corresponding to when this is selected.
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle the distance zones to the oncoming object.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 152 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 153

Front View Plus Top View Front And Rear Camera Washers
CAUTION!
Pressing the Front View will show you what is When the front windshield washer is activated by pull-
immediately in front of the vehicle and is ing the windshield wiper/washer lever rearward, the • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
always paired with the Top View of the front camera is also washed. driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
vehicle. When the rear window washer is activated by pushing to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is rec-
the windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the Rear ommended that the driver look frequently over
Front Cross Path View
Back Up camera and Digital Rearview Mirror his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will give
(if equipped) cameras are also washed. For more infor-
the driver a wider angle view of the front
mation, see page 57.
camera system. The Top View will be dis- ZOOM VIEW
abled when this is selected. NOTE: When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
Back Up Camera View and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up in any gear selector position, Zoom View is available. 4
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in
View. lenses. the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to two times the standard
• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see view.
NOTE: an authorized dealer.
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the Pressing the icon a second time will return
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear the view to the standard Back Up Camera
WARNING! display.
View screen will return to the Surround View Camera
menu. If the Back Up Camera was manually activated Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system, using the Surround View Camera. Always check care- When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
exiting out of the display screen will return to the Con- fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
trols menu. pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
Deactivation blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE,
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
The system can be deactivated under the following
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
conditions:
result in serious injury or death. selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
• The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
(13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
• The vehicle is shifted into PARK. CAUTION! the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
• The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
the touchscreen X button is pressed. • To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
• The camera delay system is turned off manually camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
through Uconnect Settings page 168.
in your drive path.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 153 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 154 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: 2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while WARNING!
• If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, refueling. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
will appear gray.
ground while filling.
• While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
CAUTION!
REFUELING THE VEHICLE To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing near the rear
outer edge of the fuel door near the center to
unlatch. Then use your hand to rotate fuel door to
full open.
Fuel Filler
VEHICLE LOADING
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
(GVWR)
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. The Vehicle Certification Label specifies maximum
Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on the rear capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total
outer edge near the center. load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR
are not exceeded.
WARNING!
Fuel Filler Door PAYLOAD
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
NOTE: vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
○ In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the being filled. the driver, all passengers and cargo.
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
around the perimeter of the fuel door to break
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
the ice buildup. tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
○ There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors Light to turn on.
inside the pipe seal the system. (Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 154 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 155

GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING LOADING TRAILER TOWING

(GAWR) The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
In this section you will find safety tips and information
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
operation.
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not review this information to tow your load as efficiently
exceeded. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer- and safely as possible.
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
sure that the load is properly distributed over the front
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
vehicle's GVWR.
exceeded but the total load is within the specified The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
4
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or you in understanding the following information:
TIRE SIZE rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre- limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. all loose items securely before driving. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
RIM SIZE effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and not exceed the GVWR page 154.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size the way the brakes operate.
listed. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING! The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
INFLATION PRESSURE all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR. ready for operation" condition.
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
CURB WEIGHT control. Overloading can shorten the life of your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
vehicle. of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 155 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 156 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

WARNING! WARNING!
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer • If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ- more, it is recommended to use a weight-
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch,
control of your vehicle and cause a collision. The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a swaying you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel collision.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to • An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
eliminate the trailer sway. system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle formance, and could result in a collision.
and trailer when weighed in combination. Weight-Carrying Hitch • Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recre-
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These ational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear kinds of hitches are used to tow small and medium
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either sized trailers.
front or rear GAWR page 154.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
Weight-Distributing Hitch ADJUSTMENT
WARNING! A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage 1. Verify that the vehicle is at the Normal Ride Height.
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the NOTE:
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose con- used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for
trol of the vehicle and have a collision. it provides for a more level ride, offering more consis- proper leveling of the air suspension system.
tent steering and brake control thereby enhancing tow-
2. Position the vehicle to be ready to connect to the
ing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway con-
Tongue Weight (TW) trol also dampens sway caused by traffic and
trailer (do not connect the trailer).
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and 3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspen-
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight- sion, use the touchscreen radio settings to enable
on your vehicle. distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended Tire/Jack mode. Tire/Jack mode will be canceled
for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required and the procedure must be restarted if the vehicle
Trailer Frontal Area depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading is driven at speeds above 5mph (8 km/h).
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
4. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
the maximum width of the front of a trailer. requirements.
opening on the fender to ground; this is height H1.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 156 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 157

6. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel 9. The vehicle can now be driven.
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H2.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distribut- H1 925
ing bars per the manufacturer’s recommendations
so that the height of the front fender is approxi- H2 946
mately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference H2-H1 21
between H2 and H1 above Normal Ride Height (H2-H1)/2 10.5
[H1]).
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch off
Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the truck returns to Nor-
mal Ride Height. Perform a visual inspection of the
Measuring Height (H)
trailer and weight-distributing hitch to confirm the 4
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight manufacturers’ recommendations have been met.
distribution bars connected.

TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 157 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 158 STARTING AND OPERATING

TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)

Grand Cherokee — 2nd Row Seats
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
AWD Without Trailer
2.0L 9,625 lb (4,366 kg) 30 sq ft (2.79 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
Tow Prep Group
AWD With Trailer Tow
2.0L 12,125 lb (5,568 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,000 lb (2,722 kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Prep Group
AWD Without Trailer
3.6L 8,600 lb (3,901 kg) 30 sq ft (2.79 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
Tow Prep Group
AWD With Trailer Tow
3.6L 11,300 lb (5,126 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
Prep Group
RWD Without Trailer
3.6L 8,500 lb (3,856 kg) 30 sq ft (2.79 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
Tow Prep Group
RWD With Trailer Tow
3.6L 11,200 lb (5,080 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
Prep Group
AWD With Trailer Tow
5.7L 12,700 lb (5,761 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,200 lb (3,266 kg) 720 lb (327 kg)
Prep Group
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

Grand Cherokee L — 3rd Row Seats

Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
RWD Without Trailer
3.6L 9,000 lb (4,082 kg) 30 sq ft (2.79 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
Tow Prep Group
RWD With Trailer Tow
3.6L 11,700 lb (5,307 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
Prep Group
AWD Without Trailer
3.6L 9,000 lb (4,082 kg) 30 sq ft (2.79 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
Tow Prep Group
AWD With Trailer Tow
3.6L 11,700 lb (5,307 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
Prep Group
AWD With Trailer Tow
5.7L 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 7,200 lb (3,266 kg) 720 lb (327 kg)
Prep Group
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 158 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 159

NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight refer-
enced on the Tire And Loading Information Placard
page 303. The addition of passengers and
cargo may require reducing trailer tongue weight
and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo
(to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding
Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
• Vehicles not factory-equipped with the trailer tow
package are limited to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) GTW and
350 lb (158 kg) TW.
Hitch Receiver Cover Weight Distribution 4
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover WARNING!
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER 2 — Locking Retainers
REMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the in reverse order. tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
trailer hitch receiver. This cover is located at the bottom wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
NOTE: sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
center of the rear fascia/bumper.
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trail-
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom the fascia/bumper prior to installation. ers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn counter- collisions.
clockwise and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
outward (towards you). Consider the following items when computing the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you) your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at • The tongue weight of the trailer.
the top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 159 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 160 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Towing Requirements — Tires

Remember that everything put into or on the trailer WARNING!
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
pact spare tire.
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
must be considered as part of the total load on your • Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Plac- • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer towing while using a full size spare tire.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
ard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
and cargo for your vehicle. safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to con-
trol. You could lose control of your vehicle and have • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
TOWING REQUIREMENTS a collision. sures before trailer usage.
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle drivetrain • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over- • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
components, the following guidelines are load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause before towing a trailer.
recommended. a loss of control, poor performance or damage to • Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus- will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
CAUTION! pension, chassis structure or tires. limits.
• Safety chains must always be used between your • For further information page 303.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
axle or other parts could be damaged. chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a slack for turning corners. vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on possible personal injury.
This helps the engine and other parts of the the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. PARK (P). For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always, actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled Ser- block or "chock" the trailer wheels. with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
vicing page 270. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
• GCWR must not be exceeded. electronic brake controller is not required.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
ratings are not exceeded: of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 160 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 161

The electrical connections are all complete to the

WARNING! vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake NOTE:
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an • Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
accident. vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis- electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi- water.
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
accident.
Seven-Pin Connector 4

CAUTION! 1 — Backup Lamps

2 — Running Lamps
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) 3 — Left Stop/Turn
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should 4 — Ground
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead 5 — Battery
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal 6 — Right Stop/Turn
effort, and longer stopping distances. 7 — Electric Brakes

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights Four-Pin Connector

And Wiring
1 — Ground
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
2 — Park
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required 3 — Left Stop/Turn
for motoring safety. 4 — Right Stop/Turn
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.

NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 161 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 162 STARTING AND OPERATING

TOWING TIPS NOTE: Cruise Control — If Equipped

Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting • When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
Automatic Transmission engine braking. gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmis- • Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
sion controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent to maximize fuel efficiency.
shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE

Four-Wheel Drive Models

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4WD LOW
Without 4WD LOW
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED • Ensure vehicle is set to Normal Ride
Height — if equipped
• Transfer case in N (NEUTRAL)
• Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK

NOTE: • Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed over the tires using specific straps (not to the body).
in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. If the vehicle can- codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin- not be placed in Transport Mode (for example, down tension.
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details. engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 162 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 163

RECREATIONAL TOWING — RECREATIONAL TOWING — NOTE:

TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS QUADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED • Ensure vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height - if
equipped page 116.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain TRANSFER CASE WITHOUT 4WD
will result.
LOW RANGE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE • If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air sus-
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is pension, the engine should be started and left run-
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. MODELS ning for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehi-
not have a N (NEUTRAL) position in the transfer case.
cle’s ride height to compensate for temperature
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, follow- effects.
NOTE:
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION! 4
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake. Shift the transmission
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
into PARK. CAUTION! only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
4. Turn the ignition OFF. will cause severe transmission and/or transfer
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, follow- stated requirements can cause severe transmission
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
ing the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper
trailer).
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow- Warranty. • Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight backwards can cause severe damage to the trans-
position. fer case.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — • The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
CAUTION! QUADRA–TRAC II WITH 4WD LOW towing.

Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause RANGE • Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into N (NEUTRAL)” to be
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
The transfer case must be shifted into N (NEUTRAL) certain that the transfer case is fully in N (NEU-
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
and the transmission must be in PARK (P) for recre- TRAL). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Warranty.
ational towing. The N (NEUTRAL) selection button is • Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
adjacent to the air suspension switch. Shifts into and stated requirements can cause severe transmis-
out of transfer case N (NEUTRAL) can take place with sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
the selector switch in any mode position. improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 163 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 164 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspen- ○ If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “4WD
sion, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height Shift Canceled” or a “4WD Shift Aborted/ Retry
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar with the Auto Entry/Exit setting deselected. Shift” message will be displayed on the instru-
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be ment cluster. To reattempt shift, put the trans-
damaged. NOTE: mission in NEUTRAL (N) and push and hold the
○ Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be 4WD LOW button.
met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button, and ○ If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Shifting Into Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL) must continue to be met until the shift has been Complete 4WD Shift Put Transmission In Neu-
completed. If any of these requirements are not tral” or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Speed Must Be
met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or Below 3 MPH” or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Allow
WARNING! are no longer met during the shift, then the N Engine To Return To Idle” message will flash from
(NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash continuously the instrument cluster display page 86.
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
until all requirements are met or until the N
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N 5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
(NEUTRAL) button is released.
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the hold the recessed transfer case N (NEUTRAL) button
Electric Park Brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) ○ The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
(located by the selector switch) for more than four
a shift to take place and for the position indicator
position disengages both the front and rear drive- seconds. The light behind the N symbol will blink,
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blink-
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The Elec- ing (stay on solid) when the shift to N (NEUTRAL) is
and no position indicator lights will be on or
tric Park Brake should always be applied when the complete. A “Four-Wheel Drive System In Neutral”
flashing.
driver is not in the vehicle. message will appear in the instrument cluster.
○ A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
CAUTION! ○ If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, the engine should be started and
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with
the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before recre- all the doors closed) at least once every
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts. 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension
to adjust the vehicle’s ride height to compensate
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for for temperature effects.
recreational towing: ○ Engaging/disengaging of the Electric Park Brake
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, requires the ignition to be in the ON/RUN
with the engine running. position.
N (NEUTRAL) Button
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 164 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 165

6. After the shift is complete and the N (NEUTRAL) light 3. Start the engine or for 4xe vehicles ensure the
stays on, release the N (NEUTRAL) button. vehicle is in Ready to Drive mode, the READY indica-
tor will appear in the instrument cluster display.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and NOTE:
ensure that there is no vehicle movement. ○ Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button, and
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmis-
must continue to be met until the shift has been
sion back into NEUTRAL.
completed. If any of these requirements are not
10. Apply the Electric Park Brake. met before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
are no longer met during the shift, the N (NEU-
11. With the transmission and transfer case in N (NEU-
TRAL) indicator light will flash continuously until
TRAL), push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP N (NEUTRAL) Button
all requirements are met or until the N (NEU-
button until the engine turns off. Ensure vehicle is
TRAL) button is released. 4
in RUN position with the engine off. NOTE:
○ The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
If the engine is in high idle after a cold start, the
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. a shift to take place and for the position indicator
instrument cluster will display “To Complete 4WD
Release the brake pedal. lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
Shift Allow Engine To Return To Idle” and the trans-
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suit- fer case will not be able to shift out of N (NEUTRAL).
and no position indicator lights will be on or
able tow bar.
flashing. 7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns off,
14. Release the Electric Park Brake. Ensure vehicle is ○ A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator light release the N (NEUTRAL) button. After the N (NEU-
in RUN position with the engine off. indicates that shift requirements have not been TRAL) button has been released, the transfer case
met. will always shift to 4WD HI.
15. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (with-
out pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. 8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine
to the OFF position. off.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case N 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
9. Release the brake pedal.

(NEUTRAL) hold the recessed transfer case N (NEUTRAL) button 10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
(located by the selector switch) for five seconds.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 11. Start the engine.
normal use: 12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- 13. Release the Electric Park Brake.
nected to the tow vehicle.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake. release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 165 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 166 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4WD LOW Range —

CAUTION!
If Equipped
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa- as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar- tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where addi-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a ing through water may cause damage that may not be
tional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than avoided when in 4WD LOW range. Driving through water more than a few inches/
conventional passenger cars. centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
WARNING!
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds Do not drive in 4WD LOW range on dry pavement; bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
as conventional passenger cars any more than low- driveline damage may result. 4WD LOW range locks entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily front and rear drivelines together and does not allow controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep
in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt for differential action between the front to rear drive- water to minimize wave effects.
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to shafts. Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause Flowing Water
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of con- driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-
trol or vehicle rollover. surfaces. off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or
the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS Driving Through Water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
considered before entering the water.
useable vehicle height that will clear the current Standing Water
obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle height NOTE: Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 24 inches
should then be raised as required by the changes in Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to (61 cm) with air suspension or 21 inches (53 cm) with-
terrain. 24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or 21 inches out air suspension, and reduce speed appropriately to
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the (53 cm) without air suspension, of water while crossing minimize wave effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph
vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec- small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal perfor- (8 km/h).
Terrain switch position. The vehicle height can be mance of your vehicle's heating and ventilation system Maintenance
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain it is recommended to switch the system into recircula- After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches tion mode during water fording. Be sure to avoid lower- fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
page 112. ing the vehicle in water, ensure that the easy exit entry transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been con-
setting is turned off in Uconnect settings. taminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appear-
ance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible
to prevent component damage.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 166 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 STARTING AND OPERATING 167

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand WARNING!

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight and exhaust system for damage.
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if neces- down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean
sary page 112. Only shift into a lower gear to main- in NEUTRAL using only the brake. as required.
tain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
the wheels and traction will be lost. Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. Always on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, drive straight up or down. suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a to the values specified in the Service Manual.
control. hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may pro- things could be a fire hazard. They might hide dam-
Hill Climbing vide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually pro- age to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
vide traction to complete the climb. propeller shafts. 4
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the condi- Traction Downhill • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
tions at the crest and/or on the other side. When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use braking.
FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills. If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed WARNING!
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climb- Control use the following procedure:
ing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly down the hill, allow- down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine not have full braking power when you need it to pre-
ing the compression braking of the engine to help regu- compression drag. This will permit you to control the vent a collision. If you have been operating your
late your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed and direction. vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or and cleaned as necessary.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
skidding the tires.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
WARNING! sion whenever possible.
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or can- After Driving Off-Road a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
not make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never correct the situation.
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
(Continued) is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 167 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 168

MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS WARNING! UCONNECT SETTINGS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV • ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1- vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Radio contain malicious software, and if installed in your on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons
Instruction Manual. vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle allow you to access and change the customer program-
systems to be breached. mable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle. immediately. ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob located on the right side. Turn the control
CYBERSECURITY NOTE:
knob to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the control knob one or more times
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to To help further improve user experience, features, sta- to select or change a setting.
send or receive information from a wired or wireless bility, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
network. This information allows systems and features breach, vehicle owners should routinely check MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
in your vehicle to function properly. [Link] (US Residents) or
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea- [Link] (Canadian Residents) to learn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful about available Uconnect software updates.
the screen to turn the screen on.
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica- Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve certain option on the Uconnect system.
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. As Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s face-
always, if you experience unusual behavior, contact an plate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
authorized dealer immediately, page 325, or refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for addi-
tional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 168 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 169

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on When making a selection, press the button on the
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
FEATURES system allows you to access all of the available pro- desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
grammable features. option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
NOTE: ting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
time.
down through the available settings.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.

Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display

5
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages
are English, French, Spanish, and Italian.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it auto-
matically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display bright-
ness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness Daytime This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is daytime. To access this set-
ting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the bright-
ness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 169 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 170 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description

Display Brightness Nighttime This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is nighttime. To access this set-
ting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the bright-
ness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH
or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units
of measurement independently.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.

Entertainment Screens
When the Entertainment Screens button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s Entertainment.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Passenger Screen Permissions This setting will enable or disable Passenger Screen Permissions. Options within this
setting are “Navigation”, “Device Manager”, and “Uconnect Theater”, and each have
“On” and “Off” options.
Rear Seat Screen Permissions This setting will enable or disable your Rear Seat Screen Permissions. “On” and “Off”
options are found within “Navigation”.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 170 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 171

My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages
are English, French, Spanish, and Italian.
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
Display Mode
for more customization with the radio display brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is daytime. To access this set-
Display Brightness Daytime ting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the bright-
ness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is nighttime. To access this set- 5
Display Brightness Nighttime ting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the bright-
ness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
Theme Mode “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH
or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
Units
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units
of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 171 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 172 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description

This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
Time Format be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
Voice Options
“Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
Wake Up Word
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in, which is a feature that will allow you to interrupt
Voice Barge-in
the help message or system prompts by speaking, to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Navigation Settings
Instruction Manual for further information.
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient light-
Ambient Color Personalization
ing color in the cabin.
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” set-
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel ting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the
comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
Radio Off Delay When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are
Radio Off With Door
opened.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings page 184.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
options.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
New Text Message Pop-ups
options are “On” and “Off”.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 172 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 173

Setting Name Description

This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
Missed Calls Message
are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options
Navigation Pop-ups
are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.

Safety & Driving Assistance

When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen. 5
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency BrakingThis setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Submenu alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is
in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the
FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have
the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting
will deactivate the FCW system. If “Off” is selected, an Off icon will display on your
Instrument Cluster Display. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible
chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide
an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. If “Off” is
selected, an Off icon will display on your Instrument Cluster Display.
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 173 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 174 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description

Traffic Sign Assist Warning This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The avail-
able options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Traffic Sign Assist Sensitivity This setting will change the Traffic Sign Assist Sensitivity. The available options are “+
0”, “+ 5”, and “+ 10”.
Traffic Sign Assist Offset This setting will alter the Traffic Sign Assist Offset. The available options will allow you
to adjust the offset from a range of 0 to 5 mph.
Traffic Sign Within this setting are three additional settings: “Traffic Sign Blinking” with “On” and
“Off” options, “Traffic Sign Sensitivity” with “+ 0”, “+ 5”, and “+ 10” options, and “Traf-
fic Sign Information Offset” with selectable options between 0 to 5 mph.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Active Lane Management This setting will alert the driver when a lane departure is detected. The available
options are “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”.
Lane Warning This setting will let you choose between “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
Vibration Strength This setting will allow you to change the vibration strength between “Low”, “Medium”,
and “High”.
Steering Assist Strength This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Night Vision Video Warning This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray cluster indicator
light on or off.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected
and provide “only warning” and “warning + braking assist” options.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Side Distance Warning This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off.
Drowsy Driver Detection This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indi-
cating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 174 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 175

Setting Name Description

Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehi-
cle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default This setting will change the Electric Power Steering Default. The available options are
“Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for the standard effort steer-
ing experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering experience.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is run-
ning, or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message
will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.

Clock & Date 5

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will con-
trol the time via the GPS location.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 175 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 176 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description

Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can
scroll through the available days, months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
options are “On” and “Off”.

Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 176 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 177

Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options
are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is com-
pleted by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off. 5

Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 177 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 178 MULTIMEDIA

Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.

Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors
will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
Auto Folding Side Mirrors turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 178 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 179

Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
• When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Ambient Color Personalization This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient light-
ing color in the cabin.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”,
“60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight
5
Illumination on Approach” must be selected above 0 seconds for the feature to be
enabled. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Proximity Wake-Up This setting will allow you to turn on or off some exterior and interior lighting illumina-
tion when approaching the vehicle.
NOTE:
“Headlight Illumination On Approach” must be set to a value other than zero for “Prox-
imity Wake-Up” to be active.
Greeting Lights When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight Illumination On
Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is selected, it allows the
adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are
unlocked with the key fob. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight Illumina-
tion On Approach” must be selected above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 179 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 180 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description

Cornering Lights When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the rel-
evant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.

Brakes
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a
pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No” options.

Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 180 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 181

Setting Name Description

Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” set-
ting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
linked to the key fob.
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. 5
Power Liftgate Alert
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will lock the doors after 30 seconds of the doors remaining unlocked. The
Auto Relock
available options are “On” and “Off”.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 181 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 182 MULTIMEDIA

Seats & Comfort

When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut
off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” set-
ting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting (if equipped) will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout This setting will activate the 3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout. Selectable options are
“Off”, “Lock On Ignition”, and “Always Locked”.

Key Off Options

When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Sound Horn With Lower This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the key fob.
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”,
and “90 sec”.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 182 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 183

Setting Name Description

Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut
off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Windows With Key Fob This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off. The avail-
able options are “On” and “Off”.

Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. 5
Setting Name Description
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Display Suspension Messages This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The
“All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only
display warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Auxiliary Mode This setting will allow you to set the Auxiliary Suspension Mode. The available options
are “Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment Mode”. In Transport Mode, the
vehicle will not auto level when being transported by another vehicle. In Wheel Align-
ment Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when a wheel alignment is being performed.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 183 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 184 MULTIMEDIA

Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the vol-
ume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”,
“2”, and “Max”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started, if selected.
The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system
resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media,
Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Media Expander This setting will allow you to turn the Media Expander setting “On” or “Off”.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 184 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 185

Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Notification Sounds Turn this setting “On” or “Off” to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
New Text Message Pop-Ups
phone on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
Missed Calls Message
on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
5

SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip spe-
cific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
• A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM®
menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 185 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 186 MULTIMEDIA

Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.

Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
the setting are “On” and “Off”.

System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
Version Information
information about the version of your radio.
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
License Information
licensing information of your radio.
Passenger License Information When this feature is selected, Passenger License Information is displayed.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 186 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 187

Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Setting Name Description

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projec- 5
tion. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed
to cancel the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values for your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 187 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 188 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode: The Passenger Screen will need to be turned On each
The remote sound system controls are located on the RADIO OPERATION time the vehicle is started, and the system will display
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine the Home screen upon boot up.
o’clock positions. Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station, and pushing the bottom of the switch PASSENGER SCREEN
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
PERMISSIONS
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- Through the Uconnect system, features within the Pas-
grammed in the radio preset button. senger Screen can be activated and deactivated
through Passenger Screen Permissions. To access Per-
MEDIA MODE missions, press the Vehicle button in the Menu Bar and
select the Settings tab. Then, press the Passenger
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
Screen Settings menu. Press the On button for the Pas-
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
senger Screen Permissions setting to activate
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
Permissions.
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
Steering Wheel Audio Controls current track begins to play.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

push button in the center and controls the volume and
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the Your vehicle may be equipped with a Passenger Screen
rocker switch increases the volume, and pushing the located above the glove compartment on the passenger
bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume. side of the vehicle. From the Passenger Screen, you will
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button makes be able to access similar features seen within the
the radio switch between the various modes available Uconnect radio, such as media functions, Rear Seat
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.) Entertainment with Amazon FireTV Built-in, Navigation,
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push and device management.
Passenger Screen Permissions Settings Menu
button in the center. The function of the left-hand con- To begin using the Passenger Screen, push the Power
trol is different depending on which mode you are in. button in the center stack, or press the Power button By default, the Passenger Screen Permissions setting is
under the Controls tab within the Uconnect system. The set to “Off”, and the driver will need to give permission
Passenger Screen can be turned off by accessing the for the different features.
Control screen and pressing the Power Off button.
When Permissions is turned “On”, you can individually
You must link Bluetooth® headphones to the Passen- select the permissions for the followings:
ger Screen to begin listening to the system’s audio
page 191. • Navigation

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 188 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 189

• Device Manager features of the Passenger Screen. On the left side of NOTE:
• Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped the screen, you can access “Notifications and System Headphone volume can also be manually adjusted from
Controls”. the headphones. Changing the headphone volume
Passenger Screen Permissions can also be activated
through the Controls screen, under the Vehicle button The Notifications button (the bell) will take you to the manually will not reflect in the headphone volume
in the Menu Bar. If “Deny Passenger Screen Permis- Notifications screen, identical to what is seen in the slider on the Passenger Screen.
sions” is turned “On”, the setting will switch itself to main radio. If the Screen Off button is pressed, the Passenger
“Off”. You can cycle between the features by swiping left or Screen will continue to operate, but the screen will go
right on the touchscreen. When accessing a feature, dark. Tap the screen again to return to the display.
HOME SCREEN press the Home button on the left side to access the While the screen is off, audio will continue to play from
feature view and select a different feature. the Passenger Screen.
The available features are: The Power Off button will fully shut down the Passenger
Screen. No audio or video will play from it.
• Audio
• Video & Images
• HDMI
• Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped 5
• Navigation
• Devices
• Cameras
Controls Screen
From the Controls Screen, you can adjust the daytime/
nighttime brightness of the screen, change headphone
volume, and power off the Passenger Screen.
Passenger Screen Home Screen To change the brightness, adjust the slider up or down,
or press the Up or Down Arrow button located next to
the slider. “Up” will increase brightness; “Down” will Passenger Screen Controls Screen
1 — Home Screen Button decrease brightness. Daytime and nighttime brightness
2 — Notifications Button levels will vary, and the adjustment maximum/
3 — Controls Button minimum will differ depending on the time of day. 1 — Screen Off
4 — Feature Cards 2 — Display Brightness
To change the headphone volume, adjust the slider up 3 — Manage Headphones
or down, or press the Up or Down Arrow button located 4 — Headphone Volume
When the Passenger Screen is started up and no other
next to the slider. “Up” will increase the volume; “Down” 5 — Power Off
media was running during the last ignition cycle, the
will decrease the volume. 6 — Mute Headphones
Home screen will display. Here, you can select from the

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 189 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 190 MULTIMEDIA

AUDIO AND VIDEO • AV 2 — If Equipped

• Rear Screen 1 Listen In — If Equipped
• Rear Screen 2 Listen In — If Equipped
NOTE:
• Audio devices connected via Bluetooth® must be
done through the Device Manager in the radio. For
more information on pairing a device, refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
• If the driver is listening to “Live Radio”, the option
will not be available in the Passenger Screen. Select
“Now Playing On Radio” to listen to the currently
playing station. If the driver selects a radio station
while the Passenger Screen is playing live radio con-
Playing A Video
tent, the feed will end on the Passenger Screen and
Audio Feature control will be given to the Uconnect system.
1 — Source Bar
On the Preset menu, you will be able to listen to saved
1 — All Sources Tab 2 — Now Playing Tab
radio presets. Press the desired preset to begin
2 — Now Playing Tab 3 — Browse Button
listening. 4 — Preset Bar
3 — Browse Tab
The Browse tab will let you browse through different 5 — Related Button
Audio allows you to listen to your favorite radio station, radio stations or audio saved onto a USB or audio 6 — Seek Down Button
a connected USB device, or connected media device. device. Press “Browse” and select from the different 7 — Tune Button
You can directly change the source on the Home screen folders. You can scroll up and down to view the options 8 — Seek Up Button
by pressing the Source button in the feature. You can within those folders. Press on the desired radio station 9 — Replay Button
also expand it by pressing the Full Screen View button. or audio track to begin playing it.
To change the media source, press the Source button When the USB source is selected, you can chose a REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
video file to play if saved to a USB device. Press
and then press on the desired source. The available
“Browse” and locate the folder with the video file. Press AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN —
sources are:
• Live Radio (FM, AM, SXM)
the video file name, and it will begin to play on the Pas- IF EQUIPPED
senger Screen.
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in will let you
• Bluetooth® NOTE: control and listen in to the content being played on the
• USB 1 Not all video files will be supported from a USB. Certain rear entertainment screens. You can view the contents
• USB 2 video files may require digital rights to view or play. of the rear screens, lock the rear screens, change the
• AUX These may be unavailable for playback on the Passen- source of the rear screens, or turn the rear screens on
or off page 193.
• AV 1 — If Equipped ger Screen.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 190 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 191

HDMI PROJECTING DEVICE MANAGER To pair a set of Bluetooth® Headphones:

HDMI lets you connect a device to the provided HDMI 1. If viewing Device Manager in full screen, press the
port, using an HDMI cable, and project the device Add Device button. If viewing Device Manager on the
directly to the Passenger Screen. To begin, plug a Home screen, press “Pair Bluetooth® headphones”.
device into the HDMI port. Then, press the HDMI button 2. From the pop-up, press “Search For Headphones”.
on the touchscreen. The system will begin searching for the Bluetooth®
HDMI will continue to show the menu bar and Head- signal of your headphones.
phone Paring button.
3. Select the name of your headphones from the list of
NOTE: possible devices. The system will connect to the
headphones.
• The HDMI Card will not automatically launch when a NOTE:
new device is connected. The HDMI Card will show a
device connected, and the Card will need to be The Passenger Screen will connect to previously paired
pressed. Bluetooth® headphones after Passenger Screen
activation.
• If the user disconnects a device from the HDMI port Removing Bluetooth® Headphones
5
while the HDMI Card is in full screen, the system will
Device Manager
close HDMI and reload the Home screen. 1. From the Controls screen, press the Manage Head-
phones button.
1 — Device Settings Button
2 — Phone Connectivity Button 2. Press the Settings button (gear icon) next to the set
3 — Media Connectivity Button of headphones you wish to remove.
4 — Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® Button
5 — Add Device Button 3. Press “Delete Device”; the Bluetooth® headphones
6 — Manage Headphone Button will be removed from the system.
7 — Do Not Disturb Button
8 — Two Active Phones Button

Device Manager provides an easy place to view all the

devices connected to the Uconnect system and lets you
pair the Driver’s smartphone to the Uconnect system.
You will also pair Bluetooth® headphones to the Pas-
senger Screen from this screen.
For more information on pairing your smartphone, refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 191 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 192 MULTIMEDIA

NAVIGATION NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will lose access to a camera if
Navigation allows you to assist the driver in searching
the driver chooses to view it on the Uconnect system or
for destinations using Uconnect’s built-in Navigation
if a condition would activate the camera on the
system. For information on the full functionality of Navi-
Uconnect system (the rearview camera being activated
gation, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE).
Manual.
When a new route is selected from the Passenger
Screen, a confirmation will be sent to the driver. The 3RD PARTY APPS
driver will be able to confirm or deny the route.
If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd party
NOTE: apps, which will further enhance your Uconnect system.
Using Navigation on the Passenger Screen will not McIntosh
affect the Navigation screen in the Uconnect system.
McIntosh
McIntosh is a 3rd party app that can enhance your
The Driver can continue to use Navigation while the Uconnect system’s media player. For the app to be The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the following
Passenger Screen can “suggest” new routes or stops. effective, there must be audio playback in the Uconnect when listening to music:
media player. McIntosh can control the playback of
CAMERA audio as well as display the output level decibel meters. NOTE:
Camera will display the equipped vehicle camera feed. To launch the app, begin playing audio and follow these The Seek feature will not work while using Bluetooth®.
When selected, press the desired Camera button. The steps:
feed from that camera will display in the center of the
1. Press the Apps button.
touchscreen. Press the X button or Back Arrow button
to return to the Home screen. 2. Press the McIntosh app.

Skip Backward Press to skip backward. Press and hold to fast rewind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward. Press and hold to fast forward.
Repeat Press to repeat track. Press again to repeat playlist. Press again to turn off (works only with a USB device).
Change Channel Down Press to change channel down. Press and hold to seek channel down. While using AM/FM, pressing the channel
down will change the frequency by 0.1. Pressing and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
Change Channel Up Press to change channel up. Press and hold to seek channel up. While using AM/FM, pressing the channel up will
change the frequency by 0.1. Pressing and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
Menu Press to access McIntosh settings.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 192 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 193

About Press to learn more about McIntosh.

Audio Press to open the audio settings page of the Uconnect media player.

NOTE: • Plug and play a variety of devices into the front seat
To change the source within the app, press the source
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH Video USB port. USB ports located under the rear
screens are charge only
name. Pressing this will open a menu with all available
sources. To change the audio source outside of the
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — • Watch content individually on each rear display or
app, press the Media button, and then press the
Sources button. IF EQUIPPED mirror across both displays to watch together

To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the Bottom NOTE:
Menu Bar. OVERVIEW Vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular range
and properly equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system
Day/Night Mode Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is and Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV package.
Press the Menu button in the upper left-hand corner to designed to give your family years of enjoyment. Streaming requires a Wi-Fi connection and registered
access McIntosh settings. Tap on a Mode to set it as Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of content Amazon account to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Stream-
the default, or tap “Auto Mode” to enable your screen to from popular apps (subscriptions may be required). ing service subscriptions are not included. Services and 5
automatically switch between Day and Night Modes. Stream videos, play games, listen to music, get informa- features are subject to change or withdrawal at any
Theater Mode tion, and watch downloaded programs all while on the time, may not be available in all areas and languages,
Press the Menu button in the upper left-hand corner to road. Two Voice Remotes with Alexa are included with and may require separate subscriptions.
access McIntosh settings. Under the Theater Mode sec- the system. Press the Microphone button on the Voice Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar
tion, select “On” to bring forward the McIntosh meters. Remote with Alexa to easily find, launch, and control with RSE features and operation.
This will enlarge the meters for a more prominent view. content. Check sports scores, play music, control smart
home devices, or see your live camera feeds (compat-
NOTE: ible smart home device required and sold separately).
Theater Mode will engage after 10 seconds without In addition to streaming and downloaded content,
input from the user. changing the input in Fire TV also enables you to:
For more information on McIntosh, the McIntosh app • Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV via
and its functionality, please visit Miracast capable devices
[Link] • Stream your favorite shows with Fire TV
• Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
• Listen to audio over wired or wireless headphones
(not included, customer will have to provide their
own or play audio through in-cabin speakers with
Listen In feature in front seat)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 193 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 194 MULTIMEDIA

GETTING STARTED ACCESSING REAR SEAT Option 2

ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV • Swiping on either of the rear touchscreens.

BUILT-IN FROM THE FRONT RADIO NOTE:
When using the rear screens, the system will launch
SCREEN with Fire TV.
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in system by following these steps: ACCESSING REAR SEAT
Option 1
ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
1. Press the Media button.
BUILT-IN FROM THE PASSENGER
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
Option 2
You can also access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the TV built-in content from the Passenger Screen.
Rear Screen Entertainment For Uconnect 5/5 NAV touchscreen.
Follow these steps:
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the touch-
1. Access the Home screen for the Passenger Screen.
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen) screen. You may need to navigate to different pages
2 — Headphone Jack in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect Theater 2. Swipe right on the Home screen and select Fire TV
3 — USB C Charging Port button. Rear Seat Entertainment Controls.
4 — HDMI Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen) ACCESSING REAR SEAT FIRST TIME STARTING UP
There are four different ways to operate the features of ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV (USING THE REAR SCREENS)
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in:
• Voice Remote with Alexa BUILT-IN FROM THE REAR Boot-up Screen
SCREENS When turning on the system for the first time from the
• Front radio screen rear screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the sys-
• Passenger screen (if equipped) You can also access your Rear Seat Entertainment with
tem displaying the Fire TV logo.
Fire TV built-in by choosing one of the following options:
• Individual rear touchscreens for Rear Seat Enter- Option 1
During this boot-up sequence, language options will be
tainment with Fire TV built-in touch on each rear available for the system.
screen • The system will automatically turn on when the Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
For information on the front media hub USB/AUX ports, vehicle is started. Pushing the power button on the
Voice Remote with Alexa will turn the system back After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will
page 67.
on if it was manually shut off. If the screen is inac- then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa
tive and goes to a screen saver, the system can be (two are included with the system).
woken up by either tapping the screen or pushing
any button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 194 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 195

Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair a Voice Account Sign-in QUICK MENU
Remote with Alexa to the system. Two Voice Remotes The next step will be the option to sign in to your Ama-
with Alexa are included to be paired with each rear Accessing the quick menu will give you more options for
zon account.
screen. Fire TV.
There are two options to sign into the system:
A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each rear To access the quick menu, tap the screen and it will
screen. It will function with the rear screen it was paired • I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an appear. The quick menu is also accessible by pushing
already existing Amazon account the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with
with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each
rear screen. • I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account Alexa.
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the Some options of the quick menu are:
NOTE: on-screen steps to set up an Amazon account with the
If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen system.
• Power — This will power the screen off.
instructions will appear for trying to pair again. Parental Controls
• On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the
on-screen remote to use with the system.
Connecting to a Network Another feature that will appear during this first time
During the start-up process, the system will need to be set up is parental controls.
• Back — This will let you go back a page.
connected to a network to function. Multiple network When the parental controls page appears, it will give
• Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
sources can be options for the system. the options “Enable Parental Controls” and “No Paren- • Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain set- 5
tings in the system. For more setting options, select
Some options for a network connection are: tal Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is selected,
“Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings
• Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if acti- follow the on-screen steps to set up parental controls
menu.
vated, it will show as a possible network for the sys- for the system.
tem on the screen). • Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From
• Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network. ALEXA VOICE CONTROL here you can adjust rear climate controls and the
Are We There Yet? app.
• In-vehicle Wi-Fi. A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is
NOTE: simple to get started using this feature. Push the Micro-
When a network is connected to the system for the first phone button at the top of the Voice Remote with Alexa
time, an over-the-air-software update will take place to activate Alexa and get started.
using the Wi-Fi connection. It is recommended that an
unlimited Wi-Fi connection, if available, be used during LISTEN VIA VEHICLE SPEAKERS
this update. After this first-time update, updates will A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
only occur when one is available. built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front
radio Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button
in the top right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2.
This will allow you to have either rear screen play audio
through all the speakers in the vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 195 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 196 MULTIMEDIA

PARENTAL CONTROLS 6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with
Alexa pairing.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
(USING THE REAR SCREENS) A long press on the Home button can also re-pair a
If parental controls were not set during the first time Voice Remote with Alexa that has become
start up of the system, they can be set by following disconnected.
these steps:
NOTE:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with
with Alexa or tap the screen to access Settings in Alexa. A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each
the “quick menu”. rear screen. It will function with the rear screen it was
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen. paired with. The pairing steps will need to be done for
each rear screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”. MEDIA SOURCES INPUT
5. Select “Parental Controls”; from here you can turn (USING THE FRONT RADIO AND
Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the
controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa.
REAR SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA Users can select inputs for each rear screen from the
PAIRING front radio touchscreen by selecting the Rear Seat tab
and choosing the desired content by selecting “Launch
(USING THE REAR SCREENS) Source” on the Screen 1 or Screen 2 tab.
If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired again Inputs available within Launch Source under “Inputs”
or a new remote is being paired, follow these are “Fire TV”, “HDMI”, and “USB”.
procedures: Rear Screens
1. Install batteries into the remote. To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on the
Fire TV Home screen and select your desired input
2. Tap the screen and Select the Gear/Settings icon on
under “Input”. Voice Remote With Alexa
the screen.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the
3. Select “Settings” on the screen. top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for 1. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected
selection options. channel on or off.
4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
NOTE: 2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has options
by pressing the Circle button Up, Down, Left, or
5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”. The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on Right to navigate on-screen for selections and push-
the naming of the vehicle’s brand. ing the center button to confirm selections.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 196 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 197

3. Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to the REPLACING THE VOICE REMOTE These options will be in the top menu of “Browse
previous screen. Media” and include:
4. Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home screen.
WITH ALEXA BATTERIES • Fire TV — Selecting “Fire TV” will show streaming
Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA batter- options for categories and to select apps. This
5. Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push and hold to ies for operation. option will be selectable on the left slider menu in
fast rewind through the current audio track or video “Browse Media”. While in “Browse Media” under
To replace the batteries:
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous track. Fire TV, it will display recent activity under “Recent”.
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the This will display recent videos viewed from Fire TV
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the volume
Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery and recent downloads as well.
and + button to increase the volume.
cover downward.
7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel guide • USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recy- that are options with a USB device connected to
for the system.
cling procedures for your area. Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them • USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear
9. Prime Video — Push to launch Prime Video app. according to the polarity diagram shown inside the that are options with a USB device connected to
battery compartment. Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
10. App 1 — Push to navigate to App 1.
Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear 5
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
11. Microphone Button — Push to activate Alexa. Screens
12. Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH Rear passengers will be able to access some options
for streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “App 1”, or
13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast for- FIRE TV BUILT-IN STREAMING “App 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa. Select-
ward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track. (USING THE FRONT RADIO AND ing one of those buttons on the Voice Remote with
Alexa will take you to the home page for that respective
14. Play/Pause Button || — Begin/resume or pause REAR SCREENS) streaming service. Turning on either of the rear screens
disc play. Access Using Launch Source will launch Fire TV. By default, the rear screens will
always launch in Fire TV. More streaming options can
15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow button To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
be selected on the Fire TV home page.
on the Channel button to browse channels avail- from the front radio, press the Media tab located on the
able in Fire TV. bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option
located on the top menu bar. Select “Launch Source”,
Fire TV
16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed content and then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”. Fire TV is your source for online streaming with Rear
on Fire TV. Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
Access Using Browse Media
17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options Selecting “Browse Media” on the front radio screen will NOTE:
for Fire TV. give access to different media within Rear Seat Enter- A data source needs to be connected to the system for
18. App 2 — Push to launch App 2. tainment with Fire TV built-in. streaming to be accessible. This can be set up when
Fire TV is turned on for the first time from the rear
19. Vehicle Button — Push to activate the Vehicle
menu.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 197 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 198 MULTIMEDIA

screens. Some of these options can be an in-vehicle 4G NOTE: Some screen information includes:
Wi-Fi hot spot, capable Wi-Fi hot spot from a mobile Front radio screen mirroring and watching can only be • Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button
device, or Wi-Fi from an outside source like a home or a done when the vehicle is in PARK. The vehicle must be
garage. in an active and usable cellular range and properly
• Notifications ON/OFF Button
To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat • Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
Source” on the front radio rear seat screen and then Entertainment with Fire TV package. For streaming, a • Arrival Time
“Fire TV Home” under the Inputs. Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon account are • Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
required to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service
Viewing from the front radio screen or passenger
subscriptions are not included. Services and features
• Distance Remaining
screen mirrors or controls the Fire TV experience from To access “Are We There Yet?” from the rear screens,
one of the rear Fire TV displays. are subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may
follow these steps:
not be available in all areas and languages, and may
The menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for require separate subscriptions. 1. Tap one of the rear screens and select the Vehicle
“Home”, “Find”, “Library”, “Brand”, and “Live”.
icon or push the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote
Below the menu bar will be streaming options linked to FIRE TV APPS/GAMES (USING THE with Alexa.
your Prime account like “Prime Video”.
The front radio screen offers some options:
REAR SCREENS) 2. Select “Are We There Yet?” near the bottom of the
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat menu on the first page of options.
• Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off. Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
• Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
between the Rear Screens (for use with front radio
and select “Find” in the top menu. On the Find page, Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play
screen only).
select “App Store®”. Within the App Store® you can your favorite music or movies.
• Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen, purchase apps and games. From here you can also
this will collapse the screen to dashboard view.
select from all the apps and games that have been NOTE:
• Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer” purchased. To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a USB
and the source logo will be displayed on the icon. drive into the port. The USB drive port is located under
• Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media” ARE WE THERE YET? the radio controls in the instrument panel.
pop-up. On the rear screen you can browse the content of the
When a navigation route has been set from the
USB device by going to the USB source in the inputs.
• Back — This will let you go back the previous page. Uconnect system, the second-row passengers can use
Use the search feature to find your media faster.
• Fire TV Home — This will take you back to the Fire “Are We There Yet?” for an animated screen showing
TV home page. distance and time remaining on navigation routes, as
well as the estimated time of arrival with pop-up
• Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu. notifications.
• Remote icon — This will display the on-screen
remote.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 198 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 199

PLAY VIDEO GAMES HEADPHONES OPERATION REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS

Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using
ports located behind either of the first row seats. come equipped with headphones. Customers will need Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
to provide their own wireless headphones that can be page 57.
paired with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the
can also use their own wired headphones and plug Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select the
them into a Headphone Jack located under one of the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the Voice
rear screens. Remote with Alexa. Then select the Rear Climate Con-
Wireless Headphones Pairing trols option.
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat Entertain-
ment with Fire TV built-in using the rear screens, follow
these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote
with Alexa or tap the screen.
Headphone Jack/HDMI/USB 2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen. 5
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — USB Port (Charge Only) 4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
3 — HDMI Port Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the
NOTE: on-screen steps for pairing.
Certain high-end video games may exceed the power While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will
limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter page 69. output audio at a time.

Options within Rear Climate Controls are:

Icon Description
Climate Control ON Button
ON
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
Climate Control OFF Button
OFF
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
SYNC Button
SYNC
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 199 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 200 MULTIMEDIA

Icon Description

AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between Manual mode and Automatic mode.

Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons

Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The tem-
perature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.

Headliner Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.

Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 200 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 201

Icon Description
Blower Control
1,2,3, etc. Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.

LEGAL & COMPLIANCE • Pitch & Roll

To access Legal and Compliance information about • Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the • Suspension — If Equipped
rear screens, follow these steps: • Forward Facing Camera — If Equipped
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote NOTE:
with Alexa or tap the screen. With a Connected Services subscription (if equipped),
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen. you can record your Off-Road data and send it directly
to the mobile app. Press the Record button to begin. 5
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV” and OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
then “Legal & Compliance”.
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bot-
tom of Off-Road Pages and is present on each of the
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED selectable page options. It provides continually updat-
ing information for the following items:
Status Bar
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages, • Current Transfer Case Status
which provides the vehicle status information while 1 — Transfer Case Status
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies information • Current Selec-Terrain Mode 2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the • Current Latitude/Longitude 3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Or Selec-Speed Control
transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle, and the • Current Altitude of the vehicle 5 — Current Terrain Mode
active Selec-Terrain Mode. • Status of Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Con-
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road button trol Selected Speed in mph (km/h).
on the touchscreen from the Vehicle menu, and then • Current Terrain Mode
press “Launch Off-Road”.
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
• Vehicle Dynamics
• Accessory Gauges

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 201 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 202 MULTIMEDIA

VEHICLE DYNAMICS ACCESSORY GAUGES PITCH & ROLL

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information con- The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
cerning the vehicle’s drivetrain. of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side)
The following information is displayed: Oil Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualiza-
Voltage. tion of the current vehicle angle.
• Steering angle in degrees
• Status of Transfer Case
• Status of the Rear Axle Locker — If Equipped
• Status of Sway Bar — If Equipped

Accessory Gauges Menu Pitch & Roll Menu

1 — Coolant Temperature 1 — Current Pitch

2 — Oil Temperature 2 — Current Roll
Vehicle Dynamics Menu 3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
1 — Vehicle Dynamics 5 — Battery Voltage
2 — Steering Angle
3 — Transfer Case Status
4 — Rear Axle Status

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 202 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 MULTIMEDIA 203

SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

The wheel articulation will be represented by a yellow
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-
color in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride Height is Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
Terrain Mode through a high resolution image. Adjust-
adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen will your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
ing the Selec-Terrain Mode will alter the image on the
switch to the appropriate height and the Wheel Articula- from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
screen. The vehicle must be in the ON/RUN position to
tion will show the movement and change in height. eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the
display Selec-Terrain information.
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If
The selectable modes are as follows: your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve
• Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recom-
• Sand/Mud mended that the volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect
• Snow system.
• Auto — Default
• Sport REGULATORY AND SAFETY
NOTE: INFORMATION
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the cur- 5
US/CANADA
rent Selec-Terrain Mode.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
The Suspension page displays information concerning
Suspension Menu limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
the vehicle’s suspension.
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
The following information is displayed: further from the human body.
1 — Wheel Articulation
• Wheel Articulation 2 — Current Ride Height The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
• Current Ride Height Status found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
○ Off-Road 2 mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
○ Off-Road 1 tific community.
○ Normal The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
○ Aero radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
○ Entry/Exit emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard air-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio page 329.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 203 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 204

SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES WARNING!
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake caused by improperly installed or high output radio
as long as four seconds.
performance under most braking conditions. The sys- transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
Installation of such equipment should be per- driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
vehicle control during braking.
formed by qualified professionals. brake system is not functioning and that service is
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the required. However, the conventional brake system will
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
on.
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
The ABS is activated during braking when the system be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
down or stop.
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
likelihood of ABS activation(s). braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
You also may experience the following normal charac-
the traction afforded.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION
teristics when the ABS activates:
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those (DDD) — IF EQUIPPED
• ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may con- resulting from excessive speed in turns, following DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued and
tinue to hear for a short time after the stop)
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. warns the driver to pull over and take a break.
• Brake pedal pulsations • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- To Activate/Deactivate
stop ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip- safety of others. Uconnect system by selecting the following in order:
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result
in degraded ABS performance. 1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 204 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 205

WARNING!
If the driving style indicates that the driver is unable to REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT
follow the road trajectory and respect the horizontal
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does not lane markings while within the operating speed range (RSRA)
relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving the of the system, a pop up will display on the instrument RSRA alerts of the possible presence of an object, pas-
vehicle. Always drive alert and get plenty of rest cluster display to suggest that the driver should stop for senger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual and
before driving. If you experience fatigue while driving, a break. An audible signal will also sound. auditory notification. When the system is activated, it
do not wait for the DDD to intervene with a warning. If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the sys- displays the message "Check Rear Seat" on the instru-
Choose a safe and secure location where you can pull tem by pushing the “OK” button on the left side of the ment cluster display and sounds an auditory alert upon
over safely for a break. Only return to the road when steering wheel, the message will disappear from the the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to exit
you are in the right physical and mental condition to display. the vehicle. The system will activate automatically if a
prevent endangering yourself and others. If the driver does not acknowledge the warning, it will rear door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition
be displayed for 60 seconds and then disappear. being placed in the ON/RUN position. RSRA should be
used as a reminder to check the rear seats, it does not
System Operation NOTE: directly detect objects, passengers, or pets and is only
In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated mes- activated when the previous conditions are met.
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s steering pat-
terns, any buttons/switches that are pressed, and from sage will appear in the instrument cluster display. To enable or disable RSRA, see page 168.
the front camera, the system implements two operating
logics: WARNING!
• The first operating logic takes the driving style into 6
account, observing the road and detecting to what • Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
extent the driver can continue driving with few lane plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
crossing events. into PARK and apply the parking brake.
• The second operating logic measures the time • Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 100 mph vehicle and vehicle is locked.
(160 km/h). • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
DDD Warning Message reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 205 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 206 SAFETY

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

WARNING!
(EBC) SYSTEM The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitor-
ing the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for addi- natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
tional information. can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC system. road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), including those resulting from excessive speed in applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force Dis- turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan- engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
tribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Elec- ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
tronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in safety of others. road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
various driving conditions. or other vehicles.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steer-
ing Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Brake System Warning Light NOTE:
Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may (if equipped). See page 207 for a complete expla-
Brake Assist System (BAS) stay on for as long as four seconds. nation of the available ESC modes.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is WARNING!
system detects an emergency braking situation by not functioning properly and that immediate service is
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To Electronic Brake Force Distribution involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con- (EBD) vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking safety or the safety of others.
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over-
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 206 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 207

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) WARNING!

Partial Off
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for acti-
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap- vation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a allowed.
in counteracting the following conditions. Engine power safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
desired path. must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than the safety of others. turn off.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
NOTE:
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
appropriate for the steering wheel position. teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the the performance of the ESC system. Changes to release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the steering system, suspension, braking system, attempts may be required to return to "ESC On" mode.
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and WARNING!
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract- unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition. mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the of ESC (except for the limited slip feature 6
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle described in the TCS section) has been disabled
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/ control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated.
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Trac- When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
tion Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash ESC Operating Modes enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and tem is reduced.
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your system may have multiple operating modes. • Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
WARNING! ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
the natural laws of physics from acting on the The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
for specific reasons as noted in the following
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by Light in the instrument cluster will come on
paragraphs.
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
accidents, including those resulting from excessive mode. It should go out with the engine run-
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 207 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 208 SAFETY

comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal- Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped • 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driv-
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
ing while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
speed while descending hills during various • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
speed by actively controlling the brakes. • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
diagnosed and corrected. • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
HDC Has Three States:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys- 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction • 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the NOTE:
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
ing with brake or throttle application).
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the
your speed and driving to the prevailing road vehicle speed). transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-
conditions. Enabling HDC selected set speed and corresponding driving
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the fol- conditions.
customer has elected to have the Electronic lowing conditions must also be met to enable HDC: Driver Override
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
• The driveline is in 4WD Low. The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
• The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). brake application at any time.
NOTE: Deactivating HDC
• The parking brake is released.
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and • The driver door is closed. HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily Activating HDC the following conditions occur:
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if • The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
mode. driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set brake application.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be • The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following sum- remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
turned off previously. marizes the HDC set speeds: • The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
HDC Target Set Speeds magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking grade.
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds • P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the activate. • The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
maneuver that caused the ESC activation. • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 208 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 209

Disabling HDC
WARNING! WARNING!
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the fol-
lowing conditions occur: HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
• The driver pushes the HDC switch. vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
• The parking brake is applied. active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
• The driver door opens. responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph Hill Start Assist (HSA) vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
attention is always required while driving to maintain
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature. not apply the throttle before this time expires, the sys- warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
Feedback To The Driver injury.
tem will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC down the hill as normal.
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA Disabling And Enabling HSA
to activate:
• The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and • The feature must be enabled.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. the current setting, proceed as follows: 6
This is the normal operating condition for HDC. • The vehicle must be stopped. • If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster dis-
• The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several • The parking brake must be off. play, see page 86 for further information.
seconds, then extinguish when the driver pushes • The driver door must be closed. • If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met. • The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. page 168 for further information.
• The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several • The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
seconds, then extinguish when HDC disables due to tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; Towing With HSA
excess speed. vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear). HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
• The cluster icon and switch light will flash when HDC • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward while towing a trailer.
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
will stop and HDC will activate again once the sion is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehicles
brakes have cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch
is pressed, HSA will remain active. • If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 209 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 210 SAFETY

WARNING!
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally,
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a
Low only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on
actively controlling engine torque and
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the
brakes.
prior to releasing the brake pedal. SSC set speeds:
SSC has three states:
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park- SSC Target Set Speeds
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate) • 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
certain to place the transmission in PARK. 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col- conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid- • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
lision or serious personal injury. ing with brake or throttle application)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) vehicle speed)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
Enabling SSC
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the fol-
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake • 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front lowing conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers • The driveline is in 4WD Low. • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – if equipped
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no
• The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). • REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is
• The parking brake is released. • NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
required. • PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
• The driver door is closed.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) • The driver is not applying throttle. NOTE:
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking Activating SSC
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC tar-
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once get speed selection but will not affect the gear cho-
when an emergency braking situation may occur by the following conditions are met: sen by the transmission. While actively controlling
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will pre- • The driver releases the throttle. SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
pare the brake system for a panic stop. • The driver releases the brake. conditions.
• The transmission is in any selection other than
PARK. • SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive
mode if active. The differences may be notable to
• The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). the driver as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 210 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 211

Deactivating SSC • The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
the following conditions occur: excess speed.
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake • The cluster icon and switch light will flash then extin- actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
application guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
brakes. is recognized.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
WARNING! NOTE:
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
Disabling SSC SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow- vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The tongue weight recommendations page 155.
ing conditions occur: driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
• The driver pushes the SSC switch. speed.
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
• The parking brake is applied. trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
• The driver door opens. Traction Control System (TCS) tem is in the “Partial Off” mode.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) WARNING! 6
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately). If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
Feedback To The Driver:
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
about the state SSC is in. faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
• The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
This is the normal operating condition for SSC. remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
• The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 211 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 212 SAFETY

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas. BSM will alert earlier on faster-
approaching vehicles — up to 33 mph (54 km/h)
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) difference.
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside the NOTE:
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
the vehicle. trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in ran-
dom false detections on the trailer, and false chimes
when the turn signal is used page 168.
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located. located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is turn signal is activated during the alert on the side of
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such the vehicle corresponding to the alert, an audible
as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If block- (chime) alert can be heard. During this audible (chime)
age is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, alert, the radio volume will be reduced page 214.
Sensor Blocked” message will display in the cluster,
Rear Detection Zones both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The sys-
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will tem will automatically recover and resume function
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors when the condition clears or when an ignition cycle
to let the driver know that the system is operational. occurs. To minimize system blockage, do not block the
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sen-
any forward gear. sors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane bicycle racks, etc.), and keep it clear of road
in width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The contaminations.
zone length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the
B-pillar, and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond
the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the BSM Warning Light
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 212 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 213

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic
three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system either side and enter the rear detection zone with a of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) the warning light will be
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. relative speed of less than 33 mph (54 km/h). Fast illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
Entering From The Side approaching vehicles will receive an earlier alert based vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either on relative speed. light will not illuminate.
side of the vehicle.

Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching

Side Monitoring
6

Overtaking/Passing

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 213 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 214 SAFETY

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on Rear Cross Path (RCP) When RCP is on (Blind Spot Lights Only or Blind Spot
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli- Lights/Chimes) and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
age, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
vehicle does not require service.
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of WARNING!
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja- the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
cent lanes page 329. alert the driver. Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect a vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in seri-
ous injury or death.

Blind Spot Modes

Three selectable modes of operation are available in
the Uconnect system page 168.
Opposing Traffic RCP Detection Zones Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM sys-
WARNING! tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM 5 mph (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy- approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot the system will respond with both visual and audible
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped situations. alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn NOTE:
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
result in serious injury or death. obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 214 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 215

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime FORWARD COLLISION WARNING Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the sys-
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, tem will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION and then release the brakes.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver with
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instru-
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible ment cluster display), and may apply a limited braking
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
detected object are present on the same side at the collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) mitigate the potential collision.
will also be muted.
NOTE:
NOTE: If either FCW or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM turned off, the FCW OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
system, the radio is also muted. The FCW OFF Indicator Light will only shut off if both
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond features are turned on and active braking is enabled.
FCW Message
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
NOTE:
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is When the system determines a collision with the
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
warning message will be deactivated page 329. 6
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the system determines that a forward collision is NOTE:
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. • The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP If the driver does not take action based upon these pro- (5 km/h).
systems. gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and • The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
NOTE: mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
than vehicles, such as guardrails or sign posts
The BSM system will store the current operating mode based on the course prediction. This is expected
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter- and is a part of normal FCW activation and
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and functionality.
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
used. system will compensate and provide additional brake • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
force as required. misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the system portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next igni-
may provide maximum braking to mitigate the potential tion cycle.
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 215 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 216 SAFETY

• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If • Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting FCW Limited Warning
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
If the instrument cluster displays “Automatic Emergency
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to collision with the vehicle in front when the distance
Braking (AEB) Limited Service Required” or “Limited
the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the between the vehicle in the front is much closer. This
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
FCW system will be automatically deactivated. setting provides less reaction time than the “Far”
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
and “Medium” settings, which allows for a more
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal condi-
dynamic driving experience.
WARNING! tions, the active braking may not be fully available.
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of Once the condition that limited the system performance
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to FCW possible collision warnings experienced. is no longer present, the system will return to its full
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every performance state. If the problem persists, see an
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon- NOTE:
authorized dealer.
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning • Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” pre- Service FCW Warning
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
could lead to serious injury or death.
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not If the system turns off, the instrument cluster displays
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal “AEB Unavailable Service Required.”
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity collision, but maintains the audible and visual AEB Unavailable Service Required indicates there is an
warnings. internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still driv-
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system • Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the sys- able under normal conditions, have the system checked
page 168. tem from providing autonomous braking, or addi- by an authorized dealer.
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
NOTE: adequately in the event of a potential frontal Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
collision. If Equipped
• The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” set-
ting and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. • The system will retain the last setting selected by PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
This allows the system to warn the driver of a pos- the driver after ignition shut down. (FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
sible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/ warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are detects a potential frontal collision with a
• Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting allows far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with pedestrian/cyclist.
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using an audible/visual the same or higher rate of speed.
warning when the latter is at a farther distance than
the “Medium” setting. This provides the most reac-
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
tion time to avoid a possible collision.
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 216 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 217

Turning PEB On Or Off visual warnings (shown in the instrument cluster). If the
driver determines acceleration is needed to avoid a
NOTE: collision, when the accelerator is pressed ICA will
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the sys- cancel.
tem to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the SYSTEM (TPMS)
Control settings page 168.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emer-
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure
gency Braking button.
page 329.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
Active Braking button.
PEB Message 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the sys- when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum braking case of a possible frontal collision with the based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
to mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/ pedestrian/cyclist. the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
cyclist. If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely, for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
NOTE:
the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire pressure will
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by also increase as the vehicle is driven — this is normal
seconds and then release the brakes. When the system
the driver after ignition shut down. The system will not and there should be no adjustment for this increased
6
determines a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in
reset to the default setting when the vehicle is pressure.
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
restarted.
will be deactivated. For information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) — tires, see page 303.
(5 km/h).
If Equipped The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
ICA uses three front radar sensors located in the front threshold for any reason, including low temperature
WARNING! fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles from the effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended front or side when driving through an intersection.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect When the system determines that a collision is prob-
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/ able when turning across oncoming traffic, the system
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a will attempt to mitigate a possible collision by decelerat-
mended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and ing the vehicle. When the system determines that a
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to collision with a crossing vehicle is probable, the system
be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in
serious injury or death. may apply additional braking to supplement the driver
order for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.
braking input to attempt to mitigate a possible collision.
The system will also provide audible warnings and

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 217 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 218 SAFETY

NOTE: • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

CAUTION! nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above mance or sensor damage. Customers are encour- tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to aged to use Original Equipment Manufacturer gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the
turn the TPMS Warning Light off. (OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
operation. Light.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sure in the tire.
(24 km/h) to receive this information. sealant it is recommended that you take your The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wire-
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your less technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sen-
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of sensor function checked. sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
36 psi (248 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre- pressure readings to the receiver module.
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough toring System sensor.
to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still NOTE:
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehi- • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
cle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. tire failure or condition.

CAUTION! • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure

gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipped with Tire Fill Alert.
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
warnings have been established for the tire size
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. NOTE:
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire It is particularly important for you to regularly check the
operation or sensor damage may result when tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
using replacement equipment that is not of the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the
stopping ability. proper pressure.
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 218 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 219

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
the following components: active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
• Receiver module and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold Warning Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message. SYSTEM" message will not be present, and a pressure
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system
which display in the instrument cluster, and a NOTE: fault can occur by any of the following:
graphic displaying tire pressures When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
• TPMS Warning Light be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to TPMS sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
Pressure Warnings The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the play of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will color and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once • Using tire chains on the vehicle.
be activated, when one or more of the four the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
system will automatically update the graphic display of sensors.
active road tire pressures are low. In addi-
tion, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" the pressure value(s) and will return to its original color.
The TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the NOTE:
message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) A TPMS sensor is not offered on any size spare tire. In
with the low tire(s) in a different color page 86. updated tire pressure(s) have been received in the case
when the ignition is ON. In the case when the ignition is either option of having a full size spare equipped or not,
the tire pressure is not monitored or displayed on the 6
NOTE: OFF, the ignition on the vehicle has to be turned ON and
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 cluster for the corresponding spare tire location. If you
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
mph (24 km/h) to receive this information for the pres- install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
BAR, or kPa.
sure value(s) to be updated. pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitor-
Service TPMS Warning ing System Warning Light will remain on, a chime will
sound, and the instrument cluster display will still dis-
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
play a pressure value in the different color graphic dis-
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid
play and an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed.
when a system fault is detected. The system fault will
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
also sound a chime. The instrument cluster display will
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a mini-
tem Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
mum of five seconds. This message is then followed by
and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
a graphic display, with “--“ in place of the pressure val-
cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
ue(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System
message for five seconds and then display dashes (--)
sensor(s) is not being received.
in place of the pressure value. For each subsequent
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 219 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 220 SAFETY

off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire NOTE:
instrument cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS It is not required to have the engine running to enter
SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes Tire Fill Alert mode.
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. Once you above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come
on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the on while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
update automatically. “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display System sensor may be in an inoperative position, pre-
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next venting the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instru- ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
ment cluster display will display a new pressure value no longer be displayed as long as no system fault forward or backward.
instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is exists.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for Tire Fill Alert display screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
the TPMS to receive this information. pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire. Operation:
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire • The horn will chirp once to let the user know when
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recom-
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be system. mended pressure.
deactivated by replacing all four wheel and tire assem- • The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
blies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do NOTE: and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the
not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter user continues to inflate the tire.
• The Tire Fill Alert system will only support inflating or
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. deflating one tire at a time. The user is required to • The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and wait until the hazard lights STOP flashing or out to reach proper inflation level.
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with 26-30 seconds after the desired pressure is • The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive achieved in one wheel before switching to another. underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash • The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) —
is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
The system will be activated when the system detects
If Equipped
TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values. an increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the trans- optional feature that is included as part of the normal
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
mission in PARK for vehicles equipped with an auto- Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to allow
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
matic transmission. For vehicles equipped with a you to select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehi-
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
manual transmission, the parking brake must be cle's front and rear axle tires to, and to provide feed-
remain in place of the pressure values.
applied. back while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 220 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 221

In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is may be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you sensor signal from being received. In this case, the
will be able to select a pressure setting for both the vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward or Please pay close attention to the information in this
front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a backward. section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
pressure range from ≥15 psi to XX in 1 psi increments properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
for each axle setting. possible.
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the follow-
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the ing STFA states: Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
pressure label. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
You may also store pressure values chosen for each deflating the tire. buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
axle in the Uconnect system application as preset pres- seat.
sure values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values 2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overin-
flated or over-deflated. 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
can be stored in the Uconnect system for the front and
seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures for the 3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
front and rear axles that you want to inflate or deflate added or removed to reach proper selected pres- a rear seating position page 236.
to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a sure level.
time. 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger
NOTE: OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating
Some of the most important safety features in your
the proper child restraint page 236. 6
one tire at a time. The user is required to wait until the
vehicle are the restraint systems: 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
hazard lights STOP flashing or 26-30 seconds after the
behind them or under their arm.
desired pressure is achieved in one wheel before
switching to another. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver FEATURES child restraint to make sure that you are using it
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition properly.
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in • Seat Belt Systems 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission, and • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags shoulder belts properly.
in NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles • Child Restraints 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
with a manual transmission. The hazard lamps will Some of the safety features described in this section
come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
bags room to inflate.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the ask an authorized dealer. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflat- vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
ing the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 221 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 222 SAFETY

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
page 325 for customer service contact
System (BeltAlert) buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
information. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped buckle their seat belts.
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the Change Of Status
WARNING! driver and outboard front seat passenger If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
is in the START or ON/RUN position. until the seat belts are buckled again.
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint. Initial Indication The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas- seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
child restraint in that vehicle. senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out- BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. vating BeltAlert.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you. BeltAlert Warning Sequence NOTE:
This can happen far away from home or on your own The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
street. vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil- BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen- buckled.
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Lap/Shoulder Belts
should be belted at all times. Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat lap/shoulder belts.
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 222 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 223

under normal conditions. However, in a collision the

seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the WARNING! WARNING!
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. • Two people should never be belted into a single internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
seat belt. People belted together can crash into bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
WARNING! one another in a collision, hurting one another that your strongest bones will take the force in a
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt collision.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more for more than one person, no matter what their • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with size. you from injury during a collision. You are more
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col- likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. are meant to be used together.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
vehicle are buckled up properly. belt as low as possible and keep it snug. modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In involved in a collision, or if you have questions
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho- 6
or killed. you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and for inspection.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
have it fixed.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter- Instructions
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating adjust the seat.
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
death in the event of a crash. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
your seat belt snugly. vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck belt to go around your lap.
too. injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
(Continued) (Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 223 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 224 SAFETY

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-

bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Positioning The Lap Belt downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- that serves you best.
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the Adjustable Upper Anchorage
anchor point.
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
ately above the latch plate.
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a to make sure that it is locked in position.
collision.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 224 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 225

NOTE: Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is WARNING! and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
required in order to properly fit the original seat
upward position without pushing or squeezing the belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, the arm.
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is when worn, the distance between the front edge of
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
Seat Belt Pretensioner
until it is locked into position. the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
WARNING! increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the These devices may improve the performance of the
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec- seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer ommended seating positions. Remove and store collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. including those in child restraints.
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, NOTE:
too. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
worn snugly and positioned properly.
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant 6
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when Energy Management Feature
the vehicle is stationary.
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
Seat Belt Extender reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The
seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
a different occupant, it must be removed. if they are wearing a seat belt.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 225 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 226 SAFETY

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
(ALR) ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click”.
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac- In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys- matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
tem page 246. remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
The figure provided illustrates the locking feature for matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
each seating position. installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (Six Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
Five Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
Locations
child restraint in that vehicle.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

60/40 Second Row (Seven Passenger) Automatic Locking 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Retractor (ALR) Locations
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an the entire seat belt is extracted.
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking Mode.
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 226 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 227

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow Six And Seven Passenger Only
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer- Some of the safety features described in this section
lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold
gency) locking mode. may be standard equipment on some models, or may
the seat belt out of the path of the third row seat back be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
when it is being folded and opened. Only place the seat ask an authorized dealer.
WARNING! belt webbing in this clip while folding and opening the
seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip when The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the using the belt to restrain an occupant. collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
ture or any other seat belt function is not working associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
properly when checked according to the proce- nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
dures in the Service Manual. Air Bag System Components:
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
Air Bag System Components
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil- • Air Bag Warning Light
dren who are using booster seats. The locked • Steering Wheel and Column
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward- • Instrument Panel
facing child restraints that have a harness for 6
restraining the child. • Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Third Row Stow Clip
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
WARNING! • Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third • Front and Side Impact Sensors
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an • Seat Belt Pretensioners
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned prop-
erly on the occupant and they could be more seri-
• Seat Track Position Sensors
ously injured in an accident as a result. • Occupant Classification System

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 227 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 228 SAFETY

Air Bag Warning Light NOTE: Front Air Bags

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
monitors the readiness of the electronic gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control- for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
parts of the air bag system whenever the ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the immediately. mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
air bags will not inflate. partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that WARNING! embossed on the air bag covers.
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec- on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal- the air bag system immediately.
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
on again after initial startup.
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal- tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys- Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal- instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
function. While the air bag system is designed to be will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a 2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Knee Air Bag
an authorized dealer service the air bag system Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has 3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Pas-
immediately. been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light senger Knee Air Bag
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
first in the ON/RUN position. ately page 93.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 228 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 229

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front Front Air Bag Operation
WARNING! passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
panel during front air bag deployment could cause are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room the Advanced Front Air Bags.
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
panel. the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
upon seat position.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
collisions.
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can On the other hand, depending on the type and location
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
restraint. output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight severe initial deceleration.
input, as determined by the OCS.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not WARNING! are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing should have deployed.
child restraint in that vehicle. • No objects should be placed over or near the air
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, 6
away from an inflating air bag.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate. When the Occupant Restraints Controller (ORC) detects
Features a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag cov-
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is gener-
ers or attempt to open them manually. You may
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro- damage the air bags and you could be injured ated to inflate the front air bags.
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col- because the air bags may no longer be functional. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
lision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Control- The protective covers for the air bag cushions are senger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front designed to open only when the air bags are out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system inflating. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
components. to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col- passenger.
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
energy output is used for more severe collisions. your seat belts even though you have air bags.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 229 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 230 SAFETY

Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the infla-
Front Passenger Seat The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
tion rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any OCS estimates that:
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The • The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front light objects on it; or
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
determined by the OCS. communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
the following: Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint; or
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light

Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,

allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag WARNING! WARNING!
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front • Children 12 years or younger should always ride
passenger seat and never install a child restraint sys- • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or seat.
passenger seat. younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint. The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the able classification. The OCS estimates the seated
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child weight on the front passenger seat and where that
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not weight is located. The OCS communicates the classifi-
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing cation status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifica-
child restraint in that vehicle. tion to determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 230 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 231

In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is impor- Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
tant for the front passenger to be seated properly and seated weight on the front passenger seat able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passen- The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
gers are: positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
• Sitting upright may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter- occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
• Facing forward mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com- ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
fortably on or near the floor
result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
seatback in an upright position mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include: Not Seated Properly
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or 6
instrument panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
Seated Properly
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) upright position.
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced • Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is work- • Objects are lodged between the front passenger
ing improperly. seat and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on Not Seated Properly
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 231 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 232 SAFETY

trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,

WARNING! take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
the seatback in an upright position, your back The following requirements must be strictly followed:
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
fortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig- seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Not Seated Properly serious injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front pas- • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working • At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
properly, which may result in serious injury or tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on fastener be modified or replaced with any part
the floor under the front passenger seat. except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.

The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel WARNING!

will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS • Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
may affect the operation of the air bag system. the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
collision. This could result in death or serious
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
Not Seated Properly service immediately.
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
WARNING! components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp- OCS components must function as designed. Do not
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to make any modifications to the front passenger seat
dealer.
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop- components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 232 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 233

Knee Impact Bolsters The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury (SABICs)
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
structure. Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
WARNING! the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And Front

Passenger Knee Air Bags Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
6
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at Label Location
Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal a very high speed and with such a high force that it
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten- SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
sioners, and front air bags. ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
Supplemental Side Air Bags from a deploying air bag.
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- WARNING! headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The could be adversely affected and/or objects could be positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a pushed into you, causing serious injury. dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the ing air bag.
seats.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 233 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 234 SAFETY

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com- The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win- including some collisions at certain angles, or some WARNING!
dows in certain side impact events. side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
WARNING! killed.
air bags deploy.
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy- restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the it takes to blink your eyes. erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions. WARNING! have Side Air Bags.

• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not • Occupants, including children, who are up against
install any accessory items in your vehicle which or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously NOTE:
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket injured or killed. Occupants, including children, Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that should never lean on or sleep against the door, but they will open during air bag deployment.
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) side windows, or area where the side air bags Rollover Events
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
the roof of the vehicle for any reason. restraint. Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deploy-
Side Impacts are necessary for your protection in all collisions. ment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain They also help keep you in position, away from an on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs deployed.
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to is appropriate for the size of the child.
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu- vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags WARNING! and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pre-
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean tensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should ter of the seat. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
have deployed. plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
(Continued)
dows in certain rollover or side impact events.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 234 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 235

Air Bag System Components lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid- Enhanced Accident Response System
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
NOTE: caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
immediately.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) the following functions:
• Air Bag Warning Light • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke- • Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
• Steering Wheel and Column of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used • Cut off battery power to the electric motor
• Instrument Panel for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may (if equipped)
• Knee Impact Bolsters irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par- intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
• Supplemental Side Air Bags ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment System
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
• Unlock the power door locks
• Front and Side Impact Sensors deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
• Seat Belt Pretensioners bags will not be in place to protect you.
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
6
• Seat Track Position Sensors dent Response System:
• Occupant Classification System WARNING!
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
If A Deployment Occurs Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot • Cut off battery power to the:
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, ○ Engine
after deployment. seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor ○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi- ○ Electric power steering
NOTE: ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller ○ Brake booster
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli- System serviced as well. ○ Electric park brake
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the ○ Automatic transmission gear selector
air bag system. ○ Horn
NOTE: ○ Front wiper
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur: • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior NOTE:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abra- trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
After an accident, remember to place the ignition in the
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an STOP (OFF) position to avoid draining the battery. Care-
authorized dealer immediately. fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com-

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 235 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 236 SAFETY

partment and on the ground near the engine compart- These data can help provide a better understanding of
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and WARNING! the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or dam- • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
age to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who NOTE:
after an accident, reset the system by following the pro- works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
cedure described here. If you have any doubt, contact trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
an authorized dealer. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
not function properly if modifications are made.
Enhanced Accident Response System Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
Reset Procedure air bag system service. If your seat, including your
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
a crash investigation.
tem functions after an event, the ignition switch must any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
engine compartment and on the ground near the seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the modify the air bag system for persons with disabili- parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
system and starting the engine. ties, contact an authorized dealer. equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after per-
forming the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed
to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
Event Data Recorder (EDR) CHILD RESTRAINTS
Enhanced Accident Response System reset. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer- times, including babies and children. Every state in the
Maintaining Your Air Bag System tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air United States, and every Canadian province, requires
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
WARNING! formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro- vehicle is designed to record such data as: the rear seats rather than in the front.
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas- belts were buckled/fastened;
senger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued) • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 236 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 237

There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil- NOTE:
WARNING! dren from newborn size to the child almost large
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child • For additional information, refer to
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct [Link] or
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to call: 1–888–327–4236
hold even an infant on your lap could become so seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s • Canadian residents should refer to Transport
strong you are. The child and others could be badly Manual and on all the labels attached to the child Canada’s website for additional information:
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle restraint. [Link]
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it child-car-seat-safety
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Children who are two years old or younger and who have
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
Infants and Toddlers not reached the height or weight limits of their child
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle 6
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
Small Children grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
height or weight limit of their booster seat

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 237 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 238 SAFETY

Infant And Child Restraints Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear- facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child tion are for children who are over two years old or who loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
seats. have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should cause serious personal injury.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
allowed by the child seat.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats All children whose weight or height is above the Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc- forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt- belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear- positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit bend over the front of the seat when their back is
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car- properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
rier but are still less than at least two years old. vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
child seat. seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
WARNING! WARNING! of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. between the neck and arm?
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch-
restraint. exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not because it can loosen the child restraint attach- If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
child restraint in that vehicle. the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
(Continued) buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 238 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 239

tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the WARNING!
seat belt on the child correctly. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Child + Child Restraint LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint 6
Forward-Facing Child
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Restraint

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 239 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 240 SAFETY

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System Restraints In This Vehicle

Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions (Six

Passenger)
LATCH Label
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
Second Row LATCH Positions (Five Passenger) ing Position)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat- Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system ing Position)
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (Seven Passenger)

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-

ing Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 240 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 241

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to 65 lb (29.5 kg) (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
attach the child restraint? the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
restraint.
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child No
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
restraint?
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Five Passenger — Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
install a child seat in the center seating position.
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard Five Passenger — No
Seven Passenger – Use the provided lower anchorages
seating positions?
in the second row center seating position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
Can two child restraints be attached using a common 6
No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
lower LATCH anchorage?
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
Yes
front passenger seat? tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 241 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 242 SAFETY

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback. The anchor-
ages are under a flap with the anchorage
symbols on it. Pull the top of the flap away from the
seatback to access the lower anchorages.

Five And Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage

Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
(2nd Row Bench)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: Third Row Upper
Five, Six, And Seven Passenger Vehicles: Tether Anchorage Locations
Second Row Upper Tether Anchorage There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
Locations seating position located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away from
Five Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap
seating position located on the back of the seat. anchorages.

Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether

Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Captain's
Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
Chair)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 242 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 243

WARNING!
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
more than one child restraint. For typical installa-
tion instructions, see page 243. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See page 240
to check what type of seat belt each seating position
Six Passenger Second Row Seating:
has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
WARNING! tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
This vehicle does not have a center seating position. easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to anchorages.
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench) install a child seat in the center of the back seat. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
Seven Passenger Second Row Seating: be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard posi- the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec-
tion, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors position to make room for the child seat. You may
and some rear-facing child restraints will also be
or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard also move the front seat forward to allow more room 6
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have
position. for the child seat.
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
anchorage. WARNING! restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
Center Seat LATCH Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
than one child restraint. For typical installation
Five Passenger Second Row Seating: the top tether anchorage. See page 246 for
instructions, see page 243.
directions to attach a tether anchor.
WARNING! Always follow the directions of the child restraint 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi- all child restraint systems will be installed as described Remove slack in the straps according to the child
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH here. restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
attachments. You must use the seat belt and 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
tether anchor to install a child seat in the center pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
seating position. path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(Continued) (25.4 mm) in any direction.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 243 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 244 SAFETY

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR Installing Child Restraints Using The Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
(ALR) Seat Belt: Vehicle Seat Belt Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
used by other occupants or being used to secure child lap/shoulder belt.
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
WARNING!
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of The child could be badly injured or killed.
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the Five Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they Locations
should not play with them. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac- ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
WARNING! seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
pulled back into the retractor.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description on
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
page 226 for additional information on ALR.
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for Please see the table below and the following sections
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. for more information.

Captain’s Chairs Second Row (Six Passenger) Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 244 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 245

60/40 Second Row (Seven Passenger) Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts 6
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat Weight limit of the Child Restraint install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint? mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
front passenger seat?
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
No
against the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 245 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 246 SAFETY

Installing A Child Restraint With A 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
Switchable Automatic Locking webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
Tether Anchorage
Retractor (ALR): bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This WARNING!
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
lap/shoulder belt. mode. Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
WARNING! locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. page 240 for the location of approved tether
The child could be badly injured or killed. lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the anchorages in your vehicle.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions vehicle seat.
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi- nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may the tether strap. See page 246 for directions to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if attach a tether anchor.
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by Five Passenger
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
room for the child seat. You may also move the front path. It should not move more than 1 inch 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. (25.4 mm) in any direction. install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the age. If the seat can be moved, you may need to
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the move the seat forward to provide better access to
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt anchorage for that seating position, move the child
path. restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a available.
“click.” 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight path for the strap between the anchor and the child
against the child seat. seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 246 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 247

restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, Six And Seven Passenger
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to age. You may need to move the seat forward to pro-
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. vide better access to the tether anchorage. If there
is no top tether anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind
the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away
from the seat back, this will expose the top tether
strap anchorages.
Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On
Seatback)

3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct

path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting (Five head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
And Seven Passenger Seating) possible, route the tether strap under the head 6
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
child restraint manufacturer's instructions. around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether
WARNING! strap over the seatback and headrest then attach
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench) the seat.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 247 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 248 SAFETY

5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting (Five injured or killed.
And Seven Passenger Seating) child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
WARNING! belts.
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible using a seat belt properly.
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to TRANSPORTING PETS
increased head motion and possible injury to the Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
child. Use only the anchorage position directly pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
tether strap. or in a collision.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting (Six make sure the tether strap does not slip into the in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
opening between the seatbacks as you remove seat belts.
Passenger)
slack in the strap.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 248 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 249

CONNECTED VEHICLES Air Bag Warning Light

WARNING!
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can- The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept four to eight seconds as a bulb check when An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
information and private communications without your the ignition switch is first placed in the floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec- ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
tion & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cyber- the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
security” page 102. as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illumi- • ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault install your floor mat upside down or turn
WARNING! is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
service the vehicle immediately page 228. regular basis.
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
Defroster
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
including safety related systems, could be impaired or MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and any other floor mat. NEVER install or
an accident involving serious injury or death. place the blower control on high speed. You should be stack an additional floor mat on top of
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an existing floor mat.
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop- • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. 6
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD erable. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE Floor Mat Safety Information needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
Seat Belts Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
your vehicle.
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for tion of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat side floor area. To check for interference, with the
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
the system. with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor condi- floor mat interferes with the operation of any
tions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
for inspection. in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 249 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 250 SAFETY

WARNING! PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU EXHAUST GAS

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is VEHICLE WARNING!
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel- Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a Tires monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
loss of vehicle control. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the these safety tips:
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer- tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for fined areas any longer than needed to move your
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper vehicle in or out of the area.
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the cold inflation pressure. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to Lights closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
check for interference with the accelerator, brake, Have someone observe the operation of brake lights set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check mode.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru- • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always ment panel. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
check your floor mat has been properly installed trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat Door Latches blower at high speed.
fasteners by lightly pulling mat. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Fluid Leaks the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for exhaust system.
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
immediately. vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 250 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SAFETY 251

CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with 6
all side windows fully open.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 251 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 252

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may WARNING!
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the discharge the battery. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
switch bank just above the radio screen. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber page 329.
• The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button Other Jeep® Connect services will only be operable
if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash- ASSIST And SOS Buttons or 4G (data) network.
ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn ASSIST Call
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of 1 — ASSIST Button
an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn 2 — SOS Button The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
off the Hazard Warning Flashers. to any one of the following support centers:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST • Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when and SOS button. a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard connected to a representative for assistance. Road-
warning for other motorists. side Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving
and its location. Additional fees may apply for road-
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, side assistance.
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
• Jeep® Connect Customer Care – Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 252 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253

SOS Call
WARNING! WARNING!
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
NOTE: and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig-
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there so may result in an accident involving serious injury nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call sys- or death. function properly.
tem initiates a call to an SOS operator. To cancel the • The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
SOS Call connection, push the SOS Call button on cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
NOTE:
the overhead console or press the cancellation but- electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
ton on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
console. operator may be able to open a voice connection ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
with the vehicle to determine if additional assis- never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS tance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
buttons on the overhead console will turn green voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
once a connection to an SOS operator has been the operator should be able to speak with you or on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
made. other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE JEEP® CONNECT FEA-
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator TURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS,
the following important vehicle information to a SOS until the SOS operator terminates the connection. WILL NOT OPERATE.
operator: 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri- • Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
○ Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call ate emergency responders and provide them with could cause the air bag system to fail when you
○ The vehicle brand important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
7
○ The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
WARNING!
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator SOS Call System Limitations
through the vehicle audio system to determine if • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
additional assistance is needed. fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions capabilities.
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
WARNING! not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the location. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
assume all risks related to the use of the features vent operable network and GPS signal reception, • The overhead console lights located within the
(Continued) (Continued) ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate
red.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 253 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

• The Device Screen will display the following mes- • LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion Automatic SOS — If Equipped
sage “Vehicle device requires service. Please con- • Weather Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
tact an authorized dealer.” immediately connect you with help in the event that
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
device requires service. Please contact an autho- vided radio supplement for complete information.
rized dealer.” WARNING!

WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks Use this QR code to access your digital
• Ignoring the overhead console light could mean related to the use of the features and applications in experience.
you will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
console light is illuminated, have an authorized when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. accident involving serious injury or death.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on Scan me
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel NOTE:
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu- (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS WARNING!
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to operating the jack or changing the wheel.
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
function properly.
limited to, the following factors: • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
• The ignition is in the OFF position NOTE: vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are authority to operate the equipment. under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
damaged during a crash where it can be raised on a lift.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
nected during a vehicle crash CAUTION! on a jack.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never (Continued)
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
obstructed Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility mirror clean.
• Operator error by the SOS operator

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 254 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255

WARNING!
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. JACK LOCATION
3. Apply the parking brake. The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P). located in the rear cargo area, under the load floor.
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle 5. Turn OFF the ignition. NOTE:
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, the jacking tool
ice or slippery areas.
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if locations vary from second and third row seating.
changing the left front wheel, block the right rear 1. Locate and lift up on the load floor handle.
NOTE: wheel.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension sys-
tem, there is a feature which allows the automatic level-
ing to be disabled before changing a tire. This feature
can be activated through the Uconnect system
page 118.

NOTE:
Before changing a tire or using the jack please disable
the hands free lift gate, This feature can be disabled
through the Uconnect system page 180.

PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING Wheel Blocked Example Load Floor Handle

NOTE: 2. Access the jack and tool storage.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from 7
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
slippery areas.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.

Jack Storage Location (Second Row Seating)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 255 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Remove the jack storage cover. To remove, firmly

press the two side tabs inward while lifting up or
out.

Jack Storage Location (Third Row Seating Without Air Jack Removal (Third Row Seating With Air Suspension)
Suspension)
5. Jack And Tools Description
Jack Storage Cover Tabs

4. Release the Velcro straps and pull outward or up on

the jack and tools to remove.

Jack Storage Location (Third Row Seating With Air Jack And Tools
Suspension)
1 — Jack Tool Bag
2 — Lug Nut Wrench
Jack Removal (Third Row Seating Without Air Suspension) 3 — Tow Hook (If Equipped)
4 — Jack Handle Extension (If Equipped)
5 — Fuel Funnel
6 — Scissor Jack

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 256 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257

SPARE TIRE STOWAGE Second Row Seating — If Equipped

NOTE: 1. Lift up on the rear load floor to access the spare
tire. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire,
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, spare tire loca-
and remove the spare tire from the vehicle.
tions vary from second and third row seating.

Second Row Seating — If Equipped

For vehicles equipped with second row seating, the
spare tire is located in the rear cargo area under the
load floor.

Spare Tire Location (Third Row Seating)

CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or Spare Tire Fastener
power tool may damage the winch.
2. Remove the spare tire fastener by rotating it
counterclockwise.
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Spare Tire Location (Second Row Seating) Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the 7
vehicle.
Third Row Seating — If Equipped NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, the spare Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, the procedure for
tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of spare tire removal varies for second and third row
a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow the seating.
spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at
the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening. Removing The Spare Tire Fastener
3. After removing the fastener, pull the spare tire up
away from the fastener pin and out of the vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 257 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Third Row Seating — If Equipped

1. Lift up on the rear load floor to access the spare tire
winch plug. Locate and remove plug from the stor-
age compartment floor to expose the winch access
hole.

Wrench Rotation Releasing The Retainer

3. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
vertically behind the rear fascia/bumper.
4. Pull the metal retainer toward you to release it.
WARNING!
Winch Nut Plug
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
2. Fit the jack handle extension over the winch drive prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
nut. Use the lug wrench handle and extension to • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
completely lower the spare tire. Keep turning the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
handle counterclockwise until the winch stops. vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the trans-
mission in PARK.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.

Spare Tire Retainer • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
5. Slide the retainer up the steel extension tube and • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
winch cable. Rotate the retainer and push it through jack.
the hole in the wheel. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
Winch Drive Nut Location service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 258 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259

WARNING!
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.

Loosen Lug Nuts Jacking Locations

2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools page 255. 3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangu-
lar lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise
the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.

Jack Warning Label 7

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca- Jack And Tools Assembled
tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle. NOTE:
Proper placement for the front and rear jacking loca-
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts, tions is critical. See the following images for proper Front Lifting Point
using the lug wrench by turning them counterclock- jacking locations.
wise, one turn, while the wheel is still on the ground. NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 259 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.

6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and
install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Front Jacking Location Rear Lifting Point
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
CAUTION!
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
sill molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
sure the jack is fully engaged.

CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill molding.
Be sure the jack is placed in the proper engagement
location on the inside of the panel. Damage of the
vehicle may occur if the procedure is not properly
followed.
Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clock-

wise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears
the surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides Mounting Spare Tire
maximum stability.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 260 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261

10. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Second Row Seating — If Equipped
WARNING!
11. Return the jack and tools back into the jack stor-
1. Securely store the road wheel in the cargo area.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do age bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover by firmly
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has pushing down until the two side clips lock into
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may position.
result in serious injury.
12. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter- properly seated against the wheel.
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the as soon as possible and properly secure the spare
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased tire, jack and tool kit.
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug NOTE:
nut torque page 320. If in doubt about the cor- Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more than
rect tightness, have them checked with a torque 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Road Wheel Installed In Spare Tire Location
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station. 2. Turn the fastener clockwise until secured.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
7

Tighten Lug Nuts Reinstalling Tire Fastener

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 261 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Third Row Seating — If Equipped JUMP STARTING

1. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
facing outward. Push the end of the winch’s cable, started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
spring and steel sleeve through the back of the road another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
wheel. Making sure the valve stem is facing the pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
ground when the wheel is stowed. erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
Winch Wrench Rotation could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
power tool may damage the winch. other booster source with a system voltage greater
Installing Winch than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
2. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is directly
under the winch and between the rear fascia/
bumper and exhaust system heat shields. Raise the NOTE:
tire by turning the lug wrench on the winch exten- When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
sion clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three times to manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
make sure the cable is tight.

Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 262 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263

PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
park the vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach,
There are remote terminals located under the hood to apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
assist in jump starting. is OFF. WARNING!
NOTE: Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not touch result in personal injury or property damage due to
each other, or either vehicle, until properly connected battery explosion.
for jump starting.

WARNING! CAUTION!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Failure to follow these procedures could result in
could establish a ground connection and personal damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
injury could result. or the discharged vehicle.

Jump Starting Posts NOTE:

WARNING! Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
Remote Positive (+) Post cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
Remote Negative (-) Post • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- while making connections.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving Connecting The Jumper Cables
NOTE: fan blades. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch the remote positive (+) post of the discharged 7
right side of the vehicle looking over the fender. The
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver- vehicle.
positive battery post may be covered with a protective
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
injured.
battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on or • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
around the post. skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
sparks away from the battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans- cable to the remote negative (-) post (exposed
mission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF. metallic/unpainted post of the discharge vehicle)
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical located directly in front of the underhood fuse box.
accessories.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 263 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi- NOTE:

WARNING! tive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle from opening. If this occurs, lightly push around the
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical have the battery and charging system tested at an perimeter of the fuel door to break the ice buildup.
spark could cause the battery to explode and could authorized dealer. Re-release the fuel door by pushing on the rear outer
result in personal injury. edge near the center to unlatch. Do not pry on the door.
CAUTION! Emergency Gas Can Refueling
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged See the following steps for refueling:
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
battery.
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the 1. Retrieve funnel from under the rear cargo load floor.
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
CAUTION! battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
fuel nozzle.
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine. REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting page 255 for a capless fuel system. If refueling is
procedure. necessary, while using an approved gas can, please
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the Inserting Funnel
booster battery.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable open.
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of
the discharged vehicle.
Refueling Funnel

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 264 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265

CAUTION! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
the fuel tank after filling. by an authorized dealer. vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
Potential signs of vehicle overheating: and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con-
ditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to • Temperature gauge is at HOT (H) the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”
putting back in the spare tire storage area. • Strong smell of coolant and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
6. Close the fuel door making sure the latch is • White smoke coming from engine or exhaust immediately and call for service.
engaged by pushing on the rear outer edge near the • Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
center.

WARNING!
WARNING! MANUAL PARK RELEASE
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool-
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you WARNING!
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do
being filled. not open the hood until the radiator has had time to You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain con-
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. trol of the vehicle before activating the Manual Park
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Release. If possible, you should apply the parking
Light to turn on. If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to brake. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be overheating by taking the appropriate action. 7
burned. Always place fuel containers on the Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to
ground while filling.
• On highways — slow down. serious injury or death for those in or around the
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis- vehicle.
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission
brakes.
will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted bat-
• Turn off the Air Conditioner (A/C). The A/C system tery), a Manual Park Release is available.
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
To activate the Manual Park Release, see the following
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
steps:
• Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, and 1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in the driver’s seat.
in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 2. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB), if possible.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 265 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool, remove 4. Unlock the orange lock plug by turning it a quarter 5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully, then
the Manual Park Release access cover, which is to turn counterclockwise. firmly push the orange lock plug back to the locking
the lower left of the steering column. position within the housing. Reinstall the access
cover. If the access cover cannot be reinstalled,
repeat steps 1 through 4.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
Locked — Unlocked Position
Manual Park Release Access Cover NOTE:
5. Pull the lock plug out as far as it will go, then Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
NOTE: release it. The transmission should now be in NEU- achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Insert the flathead screwdriver or similar tool in the TRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be moved. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
lower notch of the access cover and gently rotate more than two seconds, you must press the brake
clockwise to remove. NOTE: pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
When the lever is locked in the released position, Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
the lock plug and tether will remain outside of the that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
trim panel and the access cover cannot be the wheels or racing the engine.
reinstalled.
NOTE:
6. Release the EPB only when the vehicle is securely
connected to a tow vehicle. Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before
To Reset The Manual Park Release: rocking the vehicle page 207. Once the vehicle has
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated been freed, push the ESC OFF button again to restore
in the driver’s seat. “ESC On” mode.
2. Pull the lock plug out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
Manual Park Release Location original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 266 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267

WARNING! CAUTION! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- • Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the vehicle using a commercial towing service.
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, dis-
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi- for at least one minute after every five rocking- abled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described on
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon- motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and page 162.
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4WD Low
Without 4WD Low Range Range 7
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in N (NEUTRAL)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufac-
turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 267 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE: 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
CAUTION! ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake • When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
page 106 feature is disabled before towing this wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
vehicle to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-lift air suspen-
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
sion, secure vehicle only with tire/wheel straps (no
enabled or disabled via the customer programmable front wheels ON the ground.
suspension components or body) to prevent air
features in the Uconnect Settings.
suspension from adjusting during towing against
• Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical securement straps and causing damage. Damage FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is to your vehicle may result from improper towing. FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
onto a flatbed. REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS the opposite end on a towing dolly.
• The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer
battery is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEU-
towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN wheels off the ground) under the following conditions: TRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park page 162.
Brake each time the driver's door is opened by • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case
instructions on shifting the transmission to NEU-
pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore must be
TRAL (N) when the engine is off page 265.
EPB. towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode. • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles CAUTION!
(48 km).
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
order to move the vehicle page 265. CAUTION! damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
• Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther towing.
CAUTION! than 30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission damage. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Damage from improper towing is not covered
requirements can cause severe transmission
Vehicle damage may occur. and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued) improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 268 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
(EARS)
two mounted on the front of the vehicle and one in the This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
rear. The rear tow hook will be located on the driver's Response System.
side of the vehicle.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact page 235.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for Rear Tow Hook
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could dam- This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
age your vehicle. WARNING! (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle page 236.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.

Front Tow Hooks

NOTE:
For off road recovery, it is recommended to use both of
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to
the vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 269 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 270

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
SCHEDULED SERVICING influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos- • Check engine oil level.
sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for message after completing the scheduled oil change. • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change master cylinder and fill as needed.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or • Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.

MAINTENANCE PLAN — GASOLINE ENGINES

Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System

• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 270 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
100,000

110,000
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

112,000

128,000

144,000

192,000

208,000
160,000

224,000

240,000
176,000
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000
Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
X X X X X X X
replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off- X X X X X
road or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
X X X X X X X
function.
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L.** X X
Replace spark plugs — 3.6L & 5.7L.** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
8
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and pul-
X
ley, replace if necessary.
Change transfer case fluid — Normal Usage. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 271 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
100,000

110,000
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

112,000

128,000

144,000

192,000

208,000
160,000

224,000

240,000
176,000
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000
Or Kilometers:

Change transfer case fluid — Severe Usage

(police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer X X
towing.)
Replace PCV valve. X

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 272 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 273 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

3.6L ENGINE

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Engine Oil Fill

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 274 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275

5.7L ENGINE

8
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 275 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

CHECKING OIL LEVEL ADDING WASHER FLUID CAUTION!

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must The instrument cluster display will indicate when the
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low Do not travel with the windshield washer fluid reser-
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time fluid level, the Low Washer Fluid Warning Light will illu- voir empty: the windshield washers are essential for
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after minate and the “Washer Fluid Low” message will improving visibility.
a fully warmed up engine is shut off. display.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
There are four possible dipstick types: located in the engine compartment, be sure to check Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with tery. Water will never have to be added, and periodic
• Crosshatched zone. windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). maintenance is not required.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe WARNING!
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. clean the wiper blades, this will help blade perfor-
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN mance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
and the MAX ends of the range. system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
meets or exceeds the temperature range of your cli- contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
NOTE: mate. This rating information can be found on most over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch washer fluid containers. splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
markings on the dipstick. ately with large amounts of water. Refer to Jump
NOTE: Starting Procedure page 263.
Adding 1 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
high end of the range marking. flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is a booster battery or any other booster source with
NOTE: spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch using compressed air or an absorbent cloth. clamps to touch each other.
markings on the dipstick. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
WARNING! contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
NOTE: after handling.
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine Commercially available windshield washer solvents
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is must be exercised when filling or working around the
spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed washer solution.
using compressed air or an absorbent cloth.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 276 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277

NOTE: American Petroleum Institute (API)

CAUTION! Intentional tampering with emissions control systems Approved Engine Oil
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being assessed against you. These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
mark oils.
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi- WARNING!
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the The API Starburst trademark certifies
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the You can be badly injured working on or around a 0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
terminal posts and free of corrosion. motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service The API Donut trademark certifies
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE WASHING CAUTION!
Engine Oil Selection
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
washer is not recommended. Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 323. chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is Synthetic Engine Oils
and connections however, the pressures generated
normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
by these machines is such that complete protection
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the use synthetic API approved engine oils.
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short dis- Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
tance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
8
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused bers should not be used.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues Materials Added To Engine Oil
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person- to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service on, see the nearest authorized dealer. The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are addition of any additives (other than leak detection
available which include detailed service information for dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
attempting any procedure yourself. mental additives.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 277 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
Filters The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
NOTE:
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and should be used. Inspect and clean the housing assembly if significant
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indis- dirt or debris is present before replacing the engine air
criminately discarded, can present a problem to the envi- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and cleaner filter.
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used Replacement 1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
tion surface facing downward.
1. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners on the
ENGINE OIL FILTER engine air cleaner filter cover.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover and rotate 3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner filter
at every engine oil change.
hinge to access the air cleaner filter. assembly.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for CAUTION!
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
used. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are unavailable, only lid screws or damage may result.
use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements. AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
For the proper maintenance intervals page 270. dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
WARNING! Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine 2 — Fasteners WARNING!
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces- 3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous- • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no ing assembly. approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
one is near the engine compartment before starting tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
serious personal injury. Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 278 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279

WARNING!
Cabin Air Filter Replacement 3. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
For the proper maintenance intervals page 270.
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compart-
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal WARNING!
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant ment door.
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
should be done by an experienced technician. running, or while the ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.
With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operat-
ing, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
the glove compartment. Perform the following proce-
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
dure to replace the filter:
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. There is a glove compartment travel stop on the
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — right side of the glove compartment door. Partially
close the glove compartment door and pull the Side Of Glove Compartment
R–1234yf travel stop toward you to release the glove compart-
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo- ment travel stop. 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental 2 — Glove Compartment Door
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer 4. Lower the glove compartment door to the floor.
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
8
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG com-
pressor oil, and refrigerants.

Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Door

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 279 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

5. Squeeze the retaining tabs together that secures 8. Lift the glove compartment door up and reattach are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
the cabin air filter cover to the HVAC housing. the tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
Unhinge the filter cover on the right side to fully glove compartment and sliding the clip away from excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
remove the cover. the face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reen-
gage the glove compartment travel stops.

NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.

ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT

INSPECTION
WARNING! Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Cabin Air Filter Cover
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt Conditions that would require replacement:
with vehicle running.
1 — Retaining Tabs • Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- belt body)
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out
controlled and can start at any time regardless of • Rib or belt wear
of the housing. • Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter fan blades. • Belt slips
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter • You can be badly injured working on or around a • Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage into motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you tion on pulley)
the HVAC housing. have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
• Belt broken (identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
CAUTION! service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic. • Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indi- heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
cate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
properly install the filter will result in the need to such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
replace it more often. inspected for damage and proper alignment.
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace
belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized dealer.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 280 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281

BODY LUBRICATION NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
mance of blades may be present with chattering,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-
be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease,
tions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
necessary.
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con- The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be are experienced. This inspection should include the
removed. Particular attention should also be given to following points:
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
hood latching components to ensure proper function. • Wear or uneven edges
When performing other underhood services, the hood • Foreign material 1 — Wiper
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be 2 — Release Tab
cleaned and lubricated. • Hardening or cracking 3 — Wiper Arm
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a • Deformation or fatigue
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged. holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and CAUTION!
a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
tions of salt or road film. glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may be damaged. 8
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield. 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc. 1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 281 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper NOTE:
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush ○ Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release snap.
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch ○ The wiper arm does not stay in the service up
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to sepa- engagement will be accompanied by an audible position.
rate the wiper blade from the wiper arm). click.
3. Still grabbing the bottom end of the wiper blade,
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

1 — Wiper Blade Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 1 — Wiper Blade
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. 2 — Wiper Arm
Installing The Front Wipers 1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm 4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper Installing The Rear Wiper
arm is in the full up position. 2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grab 1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and arm with your left hand. With your right hand, hold 2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the windshield. the wiper arm past its stop (far enough to unsnap the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
the wiper blade pivot from the receptacle on the end blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the of the wiper arm). place.
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 282 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283

EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION!

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine • The catalytic converter requires the use of • Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions • Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
control device and may seriously reduce engine the vehicle.
tem; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the performance and cause serious damage to the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is engine.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- COOLING SYSTEM
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes. tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, WARNING!
Replace as required.
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
WARNING! coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Car- Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
bon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor- verter will not require maintenance. However, it is had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst hot.
page 248. damage.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park NOTE: the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
over materials that can burn. Such materials might Intentional tampering with emissions control systems The fan starts automatically and may start at any
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. time, whether the engine is running or not. 8
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your • When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
contact anything that can burn. engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
position.
vice, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 283 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Engine Coolant Checks Selection Of Coolant Adding Coolant

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants page 323. Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system NOTE: allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front coolant, may result in engine damage and may prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT cool-
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from different and should not be mixed with Hybrid ant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
a garden hose vertically down the face of the Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant your vehicle.
condenser. or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT Please review these recommendations for using
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rub- engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connec- in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer • We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM as soon as possible. 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
IS HOT. that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine Material Standard MS.90032.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be com- • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
NOTE: patible with the radiator engine coolant and may that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
plug the radiator. Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to • This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro- temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl- Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
to be added to the system please contact an authorized ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
dealer. recommended. • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool- cooling system.
(conforming to MS.90032). ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
For the proper maintenance intervals page 270. tact an authorized dealer. NOTE:
• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 284 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285

• Use care when filling under hood fluids such as WARNING!

Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize
spillage onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid WARNING!
that is spilled onto the top of the engine should be
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
removed using compressed air or an absorbent damage may result. • Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never
cloth. add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Disposal Of Used Coolant cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool- Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
ant is needed to be added to the system, please regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check the system is hot or under pressure.
contact a local authorized dealer. with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
• Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT damage may result.
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as immediately. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emer- coolant should be within the OK range between the
possible. gency assistance immediately. ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
Cooling System Pressure Cap Coolant Level coolant bottle.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for 2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
without tightening the cap.
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped). (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle. 4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any level on the dipstick.
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
surfaces. is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap 8
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or replac-
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
WARNING! ing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
• Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never
month.
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald- requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
the system is hot or under pressure. not overfill.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 285 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cooling System Notes BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING!

NOTE: In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
For the proper maintenance intervals page 270.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
WARNING!
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi- the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos- This could result in a collision.
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may sible brake damage. You would not have your full • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. braking capacity in an emergency. spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in Fluid Level Check — damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant Brake Master Cylinder
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
expansion bottle must also be protected against the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
freezing.
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add fluid ure. This could result in a collision.
• If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the to bring level within the designated marks on the side of
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to
• Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini- clean the top of the master cylinder area before remov- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) ing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
Special Additives
abnormally low, check the system for leaks. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over- any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is WARNING! its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
condenser clean. • Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
page 324. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter can severely damage your brake system and/or may adversely affect seals.
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install impair its performance. The proper type of brake
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the origi-
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor- nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. reservoir.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 286 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287

Selection Of Lubricant
CAUTION! CAUTION!
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission and cause them to leak.
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New fluid page 324. It is important to maintain the
Vehicle Limited Warranty. transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid. Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
Fluid Level Check NOTE: 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not No chemical flushes should be used in any transmis-
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
require adjustment under normal operating conditions. sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer CAUTION!
can check your transmission fluid level using special CAUTION!
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
and cause them to leak.
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause shudder.
severe transmission damage. Selection Of Lubricant
CAUTION!
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 324.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
TRANSFER CASE
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not 8
Front Axle Fluid Level Check required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
Fluid And Filter Changes the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- should be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes the fluid level.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m). Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 287 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Drain WARNING! CAUTION!

First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho- If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment,
15 to 25 ft-lb (20 to 34 N·m). rized dealer. take care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air windshield wiper motor with water.
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
CAUTION!
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could system blows, contact an authorized dealer. Underhood Fuses — Gasoline Engine
damage them and cause them to leak. The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located on the
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive passenger side of the engine compartment, behind the
Selection Of Lubricant current. headlamp. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. fuse and component may be stamped on the inside
page 324.
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
FUSES extended periods of time with the engine off may result following chart.
in vehicle battery discharge.
General Information
CAUTION!
WARNING! When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro- tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating water to get into the power distribution center and
as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with possibly result in an electrical system failure.
another fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a
fuse with a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit Blade Fuses
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire 1 — Fuse Element
and/or property damage. 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni- 3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
tion is off and that all the other services are (blown fuse)
switched off and/or disengaged.
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 288 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289

Power Distribution Center

NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an authorized dealer. 8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Crank Batt
F02 – – Spare
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 – – Spare

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 289 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F06 – – Aux Battery
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 80 Amp Gray – ELEC PWR STR
F09 80 Amp Gray – ELEC PWR STR
F10 80 Amp Gray – Feed to IPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR *
F12 – – Not Populated
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM / VPMS *
F15 – 10 Amp Red ECM *
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A EPS
– 10 Amp Red
F17B Not Populated
F18 – – Not Populated
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM Valves #2 *
F20 – – Not Populated
F21 – – Not Populated
F22 – – Not Populated
F23A ECM / EPS / PIM / SLM / GPF
– 10 Amp Red
F23B Air Suspension / ELSD RR
F24 – – Not Populated
F25 – – Not Populated
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #2 *
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F28 – – Not Populated
F29 – – Not Populated
F30 – – Not Populated
F31 – – Not Populated

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 290 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F32 – – Not Populated
F33 – – Not Populated
F34 – – Not Populated
F35 – – Not Populated
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #1
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F38 – – Not Populated
F39 – – Not Populated
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow CADM MAP *
F42 – – Not Populated
F43 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)
F44 – – Not Populated
F45 – 15 Amp Blue Front Axle Disconnect
F46 – – Not Populated
F47 – – Not Populated
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
F49 – – Not Populated
F50 – – Not Populated
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
8
F52 – – Not Populated
F53 – – Not Populated
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT
F55 – 15 Amp Blue BPCM *
F56 – – Not Populated
F57 – – Not Populated
F58 – – Not Populated
F59 – – Not Populated

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 291 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F60 – – Not Populated
F61 – – Not Populated
F62 – – Not Populated
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Front
F64 – 15 Amp Blue Smart Bar Control Module
F65 – 15 Amp Blue ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Rear Axle Coolant Valve / Active Air Dam
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F67 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ASBS / Switchable Engine Mount / BSM
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F69 – – Not Populated
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil / IGN Capacitors / Fuel Inj
F71 – – Not Populated
F72 – – Not Populated
F73 – – Not Populated
F74 – – Not Populated
F75 – – Not Populated
F76 – 5 Amp Tan IDCM *
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F79 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door / ELCM / Fuel Injectors *
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #4
F82 – – Not Populated
F83 40 Amp Green – LTR Coolant Pump * / Trans Oil Pump *
F84 – – Not Populated
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR *
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed #1
F87 – – Not Populated

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 292 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed #2
F89 – – Not Populated
F90 – – Not Populated
F91 – – Not Populated
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer
F93 – – Not Populated
F94 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F95 – 10 Amp Red Batt Cool Heater *
F96 – 5 Amp Tan Elect Cool Heater *
F97 – – Not Populated
F98 – – Not Populated
F99 – – Not Populated
F100A – – Not Populated
F100B – – Not Populated
F101 – – Not Populated
F102 – – Not Populated
F103 30 Amp Pink – Frt Wiper
F104A PECP Low Temp Passive Pump *
– 15 Amp Blue
F104B AHP High Temp Aux Pump *
F105A BCP Low Temp Active Pump *
– 15 Amp Blue 8
F105B LTR Coolant Pump PECP - 2 *

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 293 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Interior Power Distribution Center — NOTE:

Gasoline Engine Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an autho-
rized dealer.
The Interior Power Distribution Center is located under-
neath the steering column on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. Fuse numbers are
labeled next to each fuse cavity, fuse descriptions cor-
respond with the following chart.

Interior PDC Location

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof Dual Pane / MTR sunroof single Pane
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel) *
F04 – 10 Amp Red Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC)
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column Lock
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – – Spare
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Digital TV (DTV) */ Sunroof Single -
F13 – 10 Amp Red
Dual Pane / Port UC1 Dual USB RR / Interior Monitoring Camera
F14 – – Spare

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 294 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion Module /
F20 – 10 Amp Red
Intrusion Sensor / Siren / Head Up Display (HUD) / Digital TV (DTV) *
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - Aftermarket
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
8
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux Switch Bank
F32 – 15 Amp Blue
Module (ASBM)
Transfer case SW / Humidity Rain Light Sensor (HRLS) / Suspension
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
SW *
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 295 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – – Spare
F41A MOD Occupant Class / Steering Column Lock
– 10 Amp Red
F41B Spare
Parktronics System MOD (PTS) / MOD Haptic Lane Feedback /
F42A
– 10 Amp Red Trailer Tow Module
F42B MOD HVAC Control / Frt ERC Motor Ctrl / RR ERC Motor Ctrl
F43A – – Spare
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 – – Spare
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
Telematics Box Module (TBM) / MOD Front Passenger Display Mod-
F50A
– 10 Amp Red ule (FPDM) / MOD DCSD *
F50B Port Diagnostics 1 & 2
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 296 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
Media HUB #1 Frt / Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless Charging Pad
F63A
– 15 Amp Blue MOD (WCPM)
F63B Not Populated
F64A MOD ORC
– 10 Amp Red
F64B Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare
CB1 – – Spare
8
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 297 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Rear Power Distribution Center — NOTE:

Gasoline Engine Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an autho-
rized dealer.
The Rear Power Distribution Center is located under-
neath the passenger seat. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
The following chart corresponds to the fuses inside.

Rear Power Distribution Center

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 Shunt – Auxiliary Battery Feed *
F04 – – Spare
F05 150 Amp Gray – Underhood PDC Feed *
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 50 Amp Red – Mod BCM Feed #2
F12 – – Spare
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 298 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F15A Spare
– 10 Amp Red
F15B Hands-Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC Cntrl Frt
F16 – – Spare
F17 40 Amp Green – Mod BCM Feed #3
F18 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – – Spare
F19B – – Spare
F20A Central ADAS Decision Module (CADM)
– 15 Amp Blue
F20B Spare
F21A
– – Spare
F21B
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red Media Hub #2 (RR) / #3 (LR)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F26 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Dump 3rd Row (LT & RT) *
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
8
F29A MOD ICS Switch Bank Rear (Frt Console)
– 10 Amp Red
F29B Spare
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 299 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F35 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
– 10 Amp Red
F36B Port Pwr USB Console (USB CH Only) / Port UCI Dual USB Rear
F37 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – – Spare
F42A Spare
– 10 Amp Red Rear Entertainment Screens 1 (Res1) / (Res2) / Media Hub #2 RR
F42B Wake Up / Media Hub #3 Wake Up / APO Illumination / 2nd - 3rd
Row Seat Switches-Illumination
F43 – – Spare
F44A 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
– 20 Amp Yellow
F44B 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1 *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger Mod
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
(SSMP) *
F51 – 30 Amp Green MOD IAir Suspension (Valves)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT) *
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1
F54 – – Spare

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 300 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F55 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter
F56 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #2 *
F57 – – Spare
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB Console
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
UBS (CH Only)
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver) *
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ADAS Decision Module (CADM) MID *
F70 – 10 Amp Red Video Routing Module (VRM) / Port Power - USB IP (USB Ch Only)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
8
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 5 Amp Tan L2+ Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) - 2 *
F75 – – Spare
F76 – – Spare
F77 – – Spare
F78 50 Amp Red – MOD IAir Suspension
F79 – – Spare

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 301 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F80 – – Spare
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS) *
F82 – 10 Amp Red SW Seat Heater (RR RT - RR LT) *
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver - Passenger SW *
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 302 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303

BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE:

TIRES
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
Numbers TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow- tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this sec-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
tion includes bulb description and replacement part
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
numbers. design standards. Tires designed to this standard
and Tire Loading.
Interior Bulbs have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
The Interior lights are LED, for replacement of any LED Tire Markings with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
lamps, see an authorized dealer.
215/65R15 96H.
Exterior Bulbs
The exterior lights are LED, for replacement of any LED • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
lamps, see an authorized dealer.
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Markings • High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. 8
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 303 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TIRE SIZING CHART

EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 304 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. 8
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
Maximum Inflation Pressure
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
Tire Placard
ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 305 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
NOTE:
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
door. tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Load-
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the ing Information Placard in page 154.
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle. NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
Tire And Loading Information Placard trailer towing, refer page 154.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
This placard tells you important information about the:
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 306 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307

Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight of Metric Example For Load Limit
Limit— luggage and cargo being loaded on the For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
(1) Locate the statement “The com- vehicle. That weight may not safely amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
bined weight of occupants and cargo exceed the available cargo and lug- 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

should never exceed XXX kg or gage load capacity calculated in Step NOTE:
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. 4.
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
(2) Determine the combined weight of ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
the driver and passengers that will be trailer, load from your trailer will be load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

riding in your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Consult vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
this manual to determine how this tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
(3) Subtract the combined weight of reduces the available cargo and lug- seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers from XXX kg gage load capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of
or XXX lbs. occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo 8
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 307 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 308 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
Tire Pressure response or over responsiveness in the steering.
CAUTION!
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe NOTE:
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: erratic and unpredictable steering response. ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
• Safety • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause could damage the valve stem.
• Fuel Economy the vehicle to drift left or right.
• Tread Wear Fuel Economy Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
• Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
Safety resulting in higher fuel consumption. been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
Tread Wear 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
WARNING! Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor- hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can the need for earlier tire replacement. sidewall.
cause collisions.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
in overheating and tire failure. with temperature changes.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion ride. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
cause damage that result in tire failure. Tire Inflation Pressures mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
especially in the Winter.
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
loss of vehicle control. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
door. 8
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob- inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle. NOTE: (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle The recommended pressures may be different for the
front and rear axles.
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
right or left. At least once a month: 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
mended cold tire inflation pressure. pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 309 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Repair NOTE:

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- meets the following criteria: on a flat tire condition.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high • The tire has not been driven on when flat. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire mode.
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original • The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch more information page 217.
(6 mm).
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Tire Spinning
additional information.
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
WARNING! experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
stopping.
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not For further information page 266.
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi- designed to be reused.
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph WARNING!
(120 km/h). Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla- ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
Radial Ply Tires tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
WARNING! tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in a
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
with other types of tires. replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 310 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311

Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire Replacement Tires

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac- The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
tires to help you in determining when your tires should tors including, but not limited to: characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
be replaced. • Driving style wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equiva-
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
when replacement is needed page 311. Refer to
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
the Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
replacement.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
• Distance driven found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced Safety Information” section of this manual for more
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle information relating to the Load Index and Speed Sym-
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended. bol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
Tire Tread WARNING! rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
1 — Tread Wear Indicators Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to those of the original wheels.
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
in serious injury or death.
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
should be replaced. NOTE: affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
For further information page 311. Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when 8
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing WARNING!
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
(Continued)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 311 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! TIRE TYPES Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of
to steering and suspension components. You could All Season Tires — If Equipped snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri- be identified by a mountain/snowflake sym-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary bol on the tire sidewall.
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
between different all season tires. All season tires can If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac- be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
ity, other than what was originally equipped on on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety the safety and handling of your vehicle.
could result in tire overloading and failure. You and handling of your vehicle.
could lose control and have a collision. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Summer Or Three Season Tires — should not be operated at sustained speeds over
adequate speed capability can result in sudden If Equipped 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
CAUTION! aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
may result in false speedometer and odometer
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor- hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
readings.
mation, contact an authorized dealer. checked before using these tire types.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 312 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313

SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
NOTE: ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein- the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con- ventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
Of Emergency” for further information. ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
CAUTION!
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
WARNING! emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result. Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig- more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
nated for temporary emergency use page 160. have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Full Size Spare — If Equipped
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom- to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
mended tire rotation pattern.
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same 8
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use the first opportunity.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
165/80-17 101P. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let- stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
T145/80D18 103M. original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 313 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the CAUTION! Clear Coat Wheels
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh CAUTION!
at the first opportunity. brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
WARNING! finish. Such damage is not covered by the New wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal- Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is this finish and such damage is not covered by the
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle recommended. New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on maintain this finish.
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
your Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
vehicle control.

CAUTION!
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
same soap solution recommended for the body of the equivalent is recommended.
vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by NOTE:
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not remove the water droplets from the brake components.
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
from corroding and tarnishing.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 314 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315

SNOW TRACTION DEVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these rec-
ommendations to guard against damage:
• Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
• Please see the following table for the recommended
tire size, axle and snow traction device:
4x2 Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Trim Level tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
P245/70R17-Two Row Only
LAREDO 265/60R18
265/50R20
S Class
Rear 265/60R18
LIMITED
265/50R20
OVERLAND 265/50R20
SUMMIT 265/50R20 20” - S Class

4x4 Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-

Axle Tire/Wheel Size 8
Trim Level tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
P245/70R17-Two Row Only
LAREDO 265/60R18
265/50R20
S Class
TRAILHAWK-Two Row Only 265/60R18
Rear
LIMITED 265/60R18
OVERLAND 265/50R20
265/50R20 20” - S Class
SUMMIT
275/45R21XL 21” - 12 mm

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 315 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING!
TIRE ROTATION
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
RECOMMENDATIONS
between front and rear axles can cause unpredict- The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
able handling. You could lose control and have a at different loads and perform different steering, han-
collision. dling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
CAUTION! The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
following precautions: tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute
• Because of restricted traction device clearance to a smooth, quiet ride. Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
between tires and other suspension components, Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause seri-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
ous damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
Remove the damaged parts of the device before NOTE:
further use. The premium Tire Pressure Monitoring System will auto- The following tire grading categories
• Install device as tightly as possible and then matically locate the pressure values displayed in the were established by the National High-
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
specific grade rating assigned by the
shown in the following diagram.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large tire's manufacturer in each category is
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry shown on the sidewall of the tires on
pavement. your vehicle.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation, operat- All passenger vehicle tires must con-
ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the form to Federal safety requirements in
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). addition to these grades.
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 316 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317

TREADWEAR WARNING!
109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
The Treadwear grade is a comparative The traction grade assigned to this tory test wheel, than the minimum
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire is based on straight-ahead brak- required by law.
tire when tested under controlled con- ing traction tests, and does not
ditions on a specified government test WARNING!
include acceleration, cornering,
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half hydroplaning, or peak traction The temperature grade for this tire is
times as well on the government characteristics. established for a tire that is properly
course as a tire graded 100. The rela- inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
tive performance of tires depends TEMPERATURE GRADES sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
upon the actual conditions of their sive loading, either separately or in
use, however, and may depart signifi- The Temperature grades are A (the combination, can cause heat buildup
cantly from the norm due to variations highest), B, and C, representing the and possible tire failure.
in driving habits, service practices, and tire's resistance to the generation of
differences in road characteristics and heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
climate. when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory STORING THE VEHICLE —
TRACTION GRADES test wheel. GRAND CHEROKEE
The Traction grades, from highest to Sustained high temperature can cause If you are storing your vehicle for more than three 8
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These the material of the tire to degenerate weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
grades represent the tire's ability to to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
stop on wet pavement, as measured • Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
perature can lead to sudden tire fail- • Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
under controlled conditions on speci- ure. The grade C corresponds to a level vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
fied government test surfaces of of performance, which all passenger air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed- ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
may have poor traction performance. eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 317 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

BODYWORK BODY AND UNDERBODY • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
MAINTENANCE finish.
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
Cleaning Headlights CAUTION!
AGENTS Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make breakage than glass headlights. such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
followed. (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne paint and decals.
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
lowed by rinsing.
Special Care
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro- once a month.
sion resistance built into your vehicle. lenses.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower
What Causes Corrosion? PRESERVING THE BODYWORK edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Washing • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
The most common causes are: • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
• Stone and gravel impact. with water. coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
• Insects, tree sap and tar. possible.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities. mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
Bug and Tar Remover to remove. ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. are well packaged and sealed.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro- • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
the paint. • Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 318 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319

INTERIORS WARNING!
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA can act as an abrasive and damage the leather uphol-
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro- stery and should be removed promptly with a damp
gram facility for inspection. cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be taken to
carpeting. avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, sol-
WARNING! vents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. your leather upholstery.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
CAUTION! NOTE:
areas they may cause respiratory harm. If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
Seat Belt Maintenance painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol- cause permanent damage. Wipe away total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. immediately. the leather seats as needed.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. • Damage caused by these type of products may not
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION!
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
buckles do not work properly. Lenses as damage to the upholstery may result.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
WARNING! molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care GLASS SURFACES
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 8
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme- cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if LEATHER SURFACES equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
(Continued)
leather upholstery. towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 319 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 320

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front cor- Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys- tightening.
ner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the vehicle through the windshield. capability, the remaining system will still function. How- the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

Wheel Mounting Surface
Windshield VIN Label Location
SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
NOTE: nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
insert it half way).
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided NOTE:
(hex) deep wall socket. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/Bolt Lug Nut/Bolt be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
Torque Size Socket Size tightened.
130 ft-lb
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
(176 N·m)

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 320 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 321

2.0L ENGINE — GRAND CHEROKEE REFORMULATED GASOLINE

This engine is designed to meet all emis- Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
sions requirements, and provide satisfactory burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
fuel economy and performance, when using Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline hav- specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
ing an octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/ improve air quality.
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane premium The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to optimal Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
performance. This increase in performance is most improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
noticeable in hot weather or under heavy load condi- system components.
Torque Pattern tions, such as while towing.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
3.6L ENGINE
WARNING! Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do 15% in this engine. sion and stability additives are recommended. Using
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle This engine is designed to meet all emis- gasolines that have these additives will help improve
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may sions regulations and provide optimum fuel fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
result in personal injury. economy and performance when using high performance.
quality unleaded regular gasoline having a Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline
is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
While operating on gasoline with the required octane regular gasoline in these engines. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the [Link] for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the 5.7L ENGINE Gasoline retailers.
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane 15% in this engine. should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
number lower than recommended can cause engine This engine is designed to meet all emission for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. regulations and provide satisfactory fuel vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys- 9
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard economy and performance when using high- tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience quality unleaded gasoline having an octane
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
considering service for the vehicle. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 321 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 322 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS • Poor cold start and cold drivability. FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
genates such as ethanol. CAUTION!
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
CAUTION! MODIFICATIONS Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com-
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel formance and damage the emissions control
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv- system components. Problems that result from running
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo- system.
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable turer and may void or not be covered under the New • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Vehicle Limited Warranty. malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
Problems that result from using gasoline containing IN GASOLINE assistance.
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Lim- is blended into some gasolines to increase octane. of these products contain high concentrations of
ited Warranty. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number mance problems resulting from the use of such
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
FUEL VEHICLES mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom- under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gaso- vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-
line with higher ethanol content may void the New cated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask NOTE:
Vehicle Limited Warranty. your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California refor- can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with mulated gasoline.
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 322 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 323

FLUID CAPACITIES — GRAND CHEROKEE

US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 23 gal 87 L
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine 10.4 qt 9.8 L
2.0L Engine Intercooler 4.4 qt 4.2 L
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 11 qt 10.4 L
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 11.5 qt 10.9 L
5.7L Engine 15 qt 14.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GRAND CHEROKEE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 year/150,000 mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 year/150,000 mile 9
Intercooler (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 323 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 324 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic
Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine must have the API Donut trademark page 277.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full syn-
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
thetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
page 277.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
(Do not use E-85).

CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Fail-
Automatic Transmission ure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Transfer Case – 1-Speed or 2-Speed Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) - Without Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant, SAE 75W-85.
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant, SAE 75W-85 with friction
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD)
modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 324 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 325

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Who is Covered
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
FOR YOUR VEHICLE are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside Assis-
tance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on the
ity service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor- your Warranty Information book. 1
All work to be performed may not be covered by the rectly and in a timely manner. 1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.,
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service 400 River's Edge Drive, Medford, MA 02155, except in AK, CA, HI, OR,
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser- WI, and WY, where services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
vice history. This can often provide a clue to the current of California, Inc., 275 East Hillcrest Drive, Suite 165, Thousand Oaks,
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
problem. CA 91360.
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable What to Do
PREPARE A LIST to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the Customer Assistance center. gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let should include the following information: USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Pro-
the service advisor know. vide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Owner's name and address required for covered services, license plate number,
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS • Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and and your location, including the telephone number from
office) which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with • Authorized dealer name problem and answer a few simple questions. You will be
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) given the name of the service provider and an esti-
mated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental • Vehicle delivery date and mileage situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE contact local police or safety authorities.
when you call for an appointment.
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week. If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit [Link] (USA) If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit [Link]
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you 10
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter- (Canada) may submit your original receipts from the licensed tow-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with ing or service facility, for services rendered within
our products and services. 30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 325 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 326 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

odometer mileage at the time of service, and current Lockout Service MEXICO
mailing address. We will process the claim based on Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will reim- Customer Relations Office
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
burse you for the reasonable amount actually paid, just a phone call away. This service is limited to provid- Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
based on the usual and customary charges for that ser- ing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not Sante Fe C.P. 05109
vice in the area where they were provided. FCA US LLC’s cover the cost of replacement keys. Mexico, CDMX
determination relating to reimbursement is final. Corre-
Towing Service In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
spondence should be mailed to:
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and confi- Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
dence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of a
P.O. Box 9145 mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will dis- PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
Medford, MA 02155 patch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
Attention Claims Department closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram ISLANDS
dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be FCA Caribbean LLC Customer Service
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any P.O. Box 191857
10 miles.
time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject to San Juan 00919-1857
restrictions and conditions of use, which are deter-
mined solely by FCA US LLC.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER Phone: (877) 426-5337

Flat Tire Service P.O. Box 21–8004

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare Phone: (877) 426-5337
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s (TDD/TTY)
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair. FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery P.O. Box 1621 US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English/
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(800) 387-9983 French
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
nearby station. This service is limited to two occur- US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
rences in a 12-month period. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
Battery Jump Assistance assistance can use the special needs relay service
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 326 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 327

SERVICE CONTRACT FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
MOPAR® PARTS
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
You may have purchased a service contract for a you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex- Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
pected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited documents, and contact the person listed in those
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
documents. it operating at its best and maintain its original
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
We appreciate that you have made a major investment condition.
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
with the ownership experience.
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date. If you have any questions about the service IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
WARRANTY INFORMATION WASHINGTON, D.C.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
If you believe that your vehicle has a
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts. vehicle and market. Refer to [Link]/om for defect that could cause a crash or
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc. further information. cause injury or death, you should imme-
service contract. We are not responsible for other com- See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi- diately inform the National Highway Traf-
panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and vehicle and market. Refer to [Link]/en/ fic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin- for further information. addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
istrator of that contract for resolution. If you have any For French, refer to [Link]/fr for further
questions about the service contract, call the FCA's Ser- information. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
vice Contract National Customer Hotline at (800) 465-
2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
Use this QR code to access your digital may open an investigation, and if it
experience. finds that a safety defect exists in a
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable protec-
tion against repair costs after your vehicle warranties group of vehicles, it may order a recall
have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the and remedy campaign. However,
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized, Scan me
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide addi- NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
tional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty. vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. 10

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 327 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 328 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ordering and Accessing Owner’s Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: Information • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
1-800-424-9153); or go to To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Change Of Ownership Or Address
[Link] or write to: website or the phone numbers listed below.
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Service Manuals *If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com- changed your address, please provide the following
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or information and mail to:
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also components and is written in straightforward language FCA US LLC
obtain other information about motor with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. P.O. Box 21–8008
vehicle safety from Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, Make sure to include the following:
[Link] charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled • Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
IN CANADA vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to • Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble- located on top left of the instrument panel)
If you believe that your vehicle has a shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic • Exact Odometer Reading
safety defect, you should contact the tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
• First and Last Name
Customer Service Department immedi- To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
cedure manuals, visit:
• Phone Number
ately. Canadian customers who wish to [Link] (US and Canada).
• Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
report a safety defect to the Canadian Owner's Manuals
• Email Address
government should contact Transport *Applies to US residents only.
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi- assistance of service and engineering specialists to
gations and Recalls at acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
1-800-333-0510 or go to [Link]/om (US) or [Link]/en/
[Link]/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ (Canada).
PCDB-BDPP. Or visit:
[Link] to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 328 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 329

GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouil-
lage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.

NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the 10
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 329 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 330

INDEX
A Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
About Your Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . .280 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . .62
Active Driving Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . .63 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .103, 109
Active Lane Management System . . . . .97, 100, 144 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . .98, 100, 121 Air Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Fluid And Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . .284 Air Pressure Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 287
Additives, Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Alarm Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 324
Adjust Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . .111
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 AutoPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Rearm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Alarm System AUX Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24 Auxiliary Driving Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .228, 230 Alterations/Modifications Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . .68
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . .235, 269 Amazon FireTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193, 197 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . .269 Amazon FireTV Built-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Ambient Light
If Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Multicolor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 B
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . .284, 323 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 276
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . .236 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . .96, 204 Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . .18
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . .228 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Battery Saver Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Arming System Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . .281
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 249 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .278 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 B-Pillar Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 168 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Air Conditioner Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . .278, 279 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . .206
Air Conditioner System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 100, 108 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 324
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Automatic Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 320

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 330 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INDEX 331

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Child Restraints D

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . .244 De-Icer, Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Infant And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .238 De-Icer, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . .109 Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . .242 Deluxe Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . .240 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . .238 Digital Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .83
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Dipsticks
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
C Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Disposal
Camera, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Cleaning Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .285
Camera, Night Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . .322
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 152 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Camera, Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 28
Camera, Surround View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . .29
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications. . . . . . .322 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Caps, Filler Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt. . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . .285 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . .250, 251 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . .285 DrowsyDriverDetection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Care And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .284
Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 E
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . .68
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . .285 Electric Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . .206
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284, 285 Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . .206, 211
Center Console, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Center Console, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .96, 97, 207
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect . . . . . . . . . .115
Charging Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .284, 323 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light. . . . . . .94
Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Emergency
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . .121 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .102 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . .248 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . .252
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .169 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 11

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 331 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 332 INDEX

Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 279 Fuel Saver Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .267 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Emergency Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 FireTV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . .102 Flashers
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 250 G
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Flash-To-Pass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .47
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .106 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Gasoline, (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .273, 274, 275 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Compartment Identification . . . . .273, 274, 275 Fluid Level Checks Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . .250, 251 Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Gross Combination Weight Rating . . . . . . . . .156
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 100 Gross Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Fold-Flat Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 323 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . .98, 99, 215 GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . .98, 99, 112, 116
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 323 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 H
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Hands-Free Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 323 Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Front And Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . .134 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . .235, 269 Front View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .51
Exhaust Gas Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 251 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 283 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Extend, Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 250, 303 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
F Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Head Up Display (HUD) If Equipped . . . . . .91
FamCam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 323 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Filters Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 332 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INDEX 333

Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 208 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . .56 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .208 Intersection Collision Assist . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Inverter Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 95
Hitches Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Adjustable Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 iPod/USB/MP3 Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Hold ’N Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . .47 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Hood J Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . .57
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . .254 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions . . . . . . .255 Lighted Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
HUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 228, 249
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Ambient, Mutlicolor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
I Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Ignition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead . . . . . . . . . .20 K Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Key Fob Not Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Key Fob Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Keyless Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101
Keyless Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . .20 Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .18 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .20 Electric Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Keyless Enter 'n Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . .96, 97
Inside Rearview Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 252 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 250
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .26 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 100
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . .52
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 90 Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . .51
Instrument Cluster Display Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . .101, 208
Vehicle Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 L Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .319 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Interior And Instrument Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Lane Management System . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . .97
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Interior Monitoring Camera . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Night Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 97, 100
Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 11

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 333 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 334 INDEX

Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 100 Massage Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . .91

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Off Road Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 McIntosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Accessory Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) . . . . . . . . . .31 Pitch And Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Selec Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
SelecSpeed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) Vehicle Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
StopStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Sway Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Sway Bar Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . .44 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Digital Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Transmission Temperature . . . . . . . . . . .96 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 100, 250 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Power Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . .92 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 252 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Load Shed Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Tilt Side Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . .92 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . .92 Modifications/Alterations Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 323
Locks Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . .217 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Multi-Function Control Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Lug Nuts/Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 N Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Operator Manual
Neutral. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Owner's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
M New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Night Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 75
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 P
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 O Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .97, 102 Occupant Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Manual Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . .321 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 334 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INDEX 335

ParkSense Q Remote Starting

Front And Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 116 Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
ParkSense Active Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . .140 Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Passenger Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 R Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Pedestrian Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . .285 Restraints, Child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Radio Restraints, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 75 Off Road Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . .306 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Roof Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Power Sound Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Rotation, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . .294, 298 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . .56 S
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Rear Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .250
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . .68 Rear Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 152 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Rear Camera, Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 73 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .30 Rear Seat Entertainment . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 RearSeatReminderAlert . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Screen, Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Power Seats Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 249
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . .224
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .224
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . .226
Power Seats, Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . .225 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . .225
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Remote Control Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Pressure Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 223
Pretensioners Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . .223
Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . .20 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . .224
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control . . . . . . .188 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
11

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 335 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 336 INDEX

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Shift Paddles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Sway Bar Disconnect

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Side Distance Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 100, 101, 222 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 250 Symbol Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 313
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Speed Control
Seat Belts Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .124 T
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 37, 40 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . .29, 30
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33, 37 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 103 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . .62
Bolster Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Third Party Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Third Row USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30
Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .306
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . .305
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 309, 313, 316
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Wheel, Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Second Row USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . .188 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24, 96 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .188 General Information . . . . . . . . . . .309, 313
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Stop/Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 100, 119 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .98, 217
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Streaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Service Contract. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 73, 75 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 168 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 73, 74 Run Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .108, 109 Sun Visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 309
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Surround View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .165

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 336 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

 INDEX 337

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 W

Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 313 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Warning Lights And Messages. . . . . . . . . . . .93
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) . .93
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Warnings, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . .55, 97, 276
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .305 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . .156, 159 U Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Uconnect 5/5 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Uconnect (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Customer Programmable Features . . . . .26, 28 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . .26, 28 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Towing Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) — Windshield DeIcer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . .162 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 276
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Traffic Sign Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . .224 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
TrailCam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 USB Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Trailer Frontal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Wipers Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Trailer Sway Control (TSC). . . . . . . . . . .156, 211 Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Hitch Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Wireless Charging Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .160 V
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Vanity Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . .159 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . .320
Weight-Carrying Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 306
Weight-Distributing Hitch . . . . . . . . . . .156 Vehicle Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . .10
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Vehicle Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 286 11

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 337 10/5/2023 [Link] AM

5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 338 10/5/2023 [Link] AM
5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 339 10/5/2023 [Link] AM
5754794_23_WL_OM_EN_USC_t_E5.pdf 340 10/5/2023 [Link] AM
 This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is
moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction
common questions.
Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit [Link]/om (USA), [Link] (Canada) or your
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE local Jeep® brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting [Link].
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT [Link] (USA) Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT [Link] (CANADA) purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area drinking. Never drink and then drive.
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to [Link]/passenger-vehicle.

DID_5754794_23e_Grand_Cherokee_OM_EN_091923.indd 2 9/19/2023 [Link] AM

 2023 GR A N D CHER OKEE/GR A N D CHER OKEE L

2023 GR AND CH EROKEE/GRAND CHEROK EE L

OWNER’S MANUAL

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).

USA Canada

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS

[Link]/om [Link]

©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Fifth Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 23_WL_OM_EN_USC

DID_5754794_23e_Grand_Cherokee_OM_EN_091923.indd 1 9/19/2023 [Link] AM